TWT42013I1.1 9500 MPR a Operations and Maintenance R3.03 SG CE

622
Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT @@YEAR. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI) STUDENT GUIDE TWT42013 Edition 1.1 Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

description

ALU MPR9500

Transcript of TWT42013I1.1 9500 MPR a Operations and Maintenance R3.03 SG CE

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT @@YEAR. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)STUDENT GUIDETWT42013 Edition 1.1

Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)2 COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Terms of use and legal notices

Switch to notes view!TERMS OF USE AND LEGAL NOTICE Alcatel-Lucent provides this training course to you subject to these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. Your use of this training course and/or this site constitutes your acceptance of and agreement to these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. These Terms of Use and Legal Notice, as well as the contents of this training course, may be updated or amended by Alcatel-Lucent from time to time without prior notice to you. Your use of the Alcatel-Lucent training materials after such update or amendment constitutes your acceptance of and agreement to said updated or amended Terms of Use and Legal Notice.

SAFETY WARNINGAlcatel-Lucent training materials can be for products or refer to products that have both lethal and dangerous voltages present. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone. The user is strongly advised not to wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Equipment referred to or used during this course may be electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.

PERMISSION TO USE CONTENT The information, communications, scripts, photos, text, video, graphics, music, sounds, images and other materials provided in this training course (collectively the "Content"), is intended for the lawful use of employees of Alcatel-Lucent and other authorized participants in this Alcatel-Lucent training course. You are hereby granted a non-exclusive, non-transferable permission to access and use the Content solely for your personal training and non-commercial use. This permission may be terminated by Alcatel-Lucent at any time for any reason or no reason, with or without notice. You must immediately cease use of the Content upon such termination.

COPYRIGHTS AND TRADEMARKSThe unauthorized copying, displaying or other use of any Content from this training course is a violation of the law and Alcatel-Lucent’s corporate policies. The Content is protected in France, the U.S. and other countries by a variety of laws, including but not limited to, copyright laws and treaty provisions, trademark laws, patent laws and other proprietary rights laws (collectively, "IP Rights"). In addition to Alcatel-Lucent’s IP Rights in the Content, in part and in whole, Alcatel-Lucent, and any of the third parties who have licensed and/or contributed to the Content, owns a copyright in the formatting and presentation of the Content.Alcatel-Lucent does not grant you any permission to use the Content other than the permission expressly stated in these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. All other use of Content from this training course, including, but not limited to, modification, publication, transmission, participation in the transfer or sale of, copying, reproduction, republishing, creation of derivative works from, distribution, performance, display, incorporation into another training course or presentation, or in any other way exploiting any of the Content, in whole or in part, for uses other than those expressly permitted herein is strictly prohibited and shall not be made without Alcatel-Lucent’s prior written consent. All characters appearing in this training course are fictitious. Any resemblance to real persons, living or dead, is purely coincidental.There may be a number of proprietary logos, marks, trademarks, slogans and product designations found in the Content. Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logos are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Alcatel-Lucent does not grant you a license to use any of the foregoing logos, marks, trademarks, slogans and product designations in any fashion. Granting of the right to access and use the Content for training purposes does not confer upon you any license under any of Alcatel-Lucent’s or any third party's IP Rights.

DISCLAIMERALCATEL-LUCENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES REGARDING THE TRAINING COURSES OR THE CONTENT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ALCATEL-LUCENT WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS, CLAIM, DAMAGE, OR ANY SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS PROFITS OR LOSS SAVINGS), WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, THAT ARISES OUT OF OR IS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH (A) ANY USE OR MISUSE OF THE CONTENT OR THE TRAINING COURSES BY YOU, OR (B) ANY FAILURE OR DELAY BY ALCATEL-LUCENT, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES IN CONNECTION WITH THE CONTENT OR THE TRAINING COURSES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE ANY COMPONENT OF THE CONTENT OR TRAINING BY YOU). SOME JURISDICTIONS LIMIT OR PROHIBIT SUCH EXCLUSION OF WARRANTIES OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES AND SO THE FOREGOING EXCLUSION OF WARRANTIES OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

GOVERNING LAWThese Terms of Use and Legal Notice are governed by the laws of France. The operation and use of the training course is governed by the laws of the country that governs your employment contract, if applicable. If any provision of these Terms of Use and Legal Notice, or the application thereto to a person or circumstance, is held invalid or unenforceable by law, statute or a court of competent jurisdiction, for any reason, then such provision shall be modified and/or superseded by a provision that reflects the intent of the original provision as closely as possible. All other provisions of these Terms of Use and Legal Notice shall remain in full force and effect. You may not assign these Terms of Use or any permission granted hereunder without Alcatel-Lucent’s prior written consent. Nothing herein shall be deemed an employment agreement or an offer of employment or an alteration in any way of a user’s terms of employment with or within Alcatel-Lucent. Copyright © 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)3 COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Course outline

4. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

5. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

6. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

7. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

1. ANSIModule 1. TWT42013-1 Course Overview

2. ProductModule 1. TWT42013-2 Overview

3. Product ArchitectureModule 1. TWT42013-3 MSS HardwareModule 2. TWT42013-4 MPT HardwareModule 3. TWT42013-5 Outdoor Hardware

4. NE OperationModule 1. TWT42013-6 Operator GUI InterfaceModule 2. TWT42013-7 Cross-ConnectionModule 3. TWT42013-8 Performance MonitoringModule 4. TWT42013-9 Alarm MonitorModule 5. TWT42013-10 Remove Cross ConnectionsModule 6. TWT42013-11 Browser Interface

5. CourseModule 1. TWT42013-12 Summary

6. TermsModule 1. TWT42013-13 Acronyms

7. ExercisesModule 1. TWT42013-14 Labs

Welcome to 9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)

Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Section 1. Course Overview

Module 1. Course Overview

Section 2. Product

Module 1. Product Overview

Section 3. Product Architecture

Module 1. MSS

Module 2. MPT-HL

Module 3. Outdoor Units

Section 4. Operation

Module 1. GUI

Module 2. Cross-Connections

Module 3. Diagnosis and Performance Monitoring

Module 4. Alarm Monitor/RSL History

Module 5. Remove Cross-Connections

Module 6. Browser

Section 5. Course

Module 1. Summary

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)4 COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Course objectives

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

Describe equipment features, main applications, physical layout, external connections and the activation procedureUse the Craft Terminal and documentation for local configurationMonitor performance List probable cause of an alarm

Welcome to 9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)

Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

Describe equipment features, main applications, physical layout, external connections and the activation procedureUse the Craft Terminal and documentation for local configurationMonitor performance List probable cause of an alarm

Your feedback is appreciated!Please feel free to Email your comments to:

[email protected]

Please include the following training reference in your email:TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Thank you!

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 1Course Overview

TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1ANSI

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Revised to release 3.03Moehlenkamp, John2012-02-073.03

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01.10 2008-09-30 Fisher, Sheldon Added to ANSI version for NAR

01.21 2009-01-23 Fisher, Sheldon Revised for R1.1 from R1.0

01.31 2009-03-05 Fisher, Sheldon Final Revision

01.40 2009-06-15 Robinson, Ken Revised to release 2.0

01.41 2009-07-20 Robinson, Ken Revised after review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Course objectives

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of the 9500 MPR-ATurn-up and provision the systemRespond to and manage alarm conditionsMonitor system and application statusMaintain 9500 MPR-A hardware and software

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Course objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 5

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

References

The following documents support the 9500 MPR-A R3.02:9500 MPR Product Information 3EM23952AHAA9500 MPR Installation Practices 3EM23953AHAA9500 MPR Operation and Administration 3EM23954AHAA9500 MPR Turn-Up 3EM23955AHAA9500 MPR Maintenance and Trouble Clearing 3EM23956AHAA9500 MPR Engineering Support Documentation 3EM23957AHAA9500 MPR-A MPT-GC User Manual 3EM24569ADAA9500 MPR-A MPR-e User Manual 3EM24570ADAA9500 MPR-A MSS-1c User Manual 3EM24571ADAA

Product documentation is available on CD-ROM and online:CD-ROM Electronic Documentation 3EM23951AHAAOnline through Alcatel-Lucent’s OnLine Customer Support (OLCS) web site at: https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.doProduct documentation updates appear on Alcatel-Lucent’s OLCS web site before they are available in any other format.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 6

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

References [cont.]

Product Information 3EM23952AHAA:IntroductionSystem Administration Features Equipment Layout Unit DescriptionsFunctional Operation Engineering Specifications

Installation Practices 3EM23953AHAA

Operation and Administration 3EM23954AHAA:Provisioning and DeprovisioningEquipment FunctionsLog In to and Out of System Administer User ProfilesCross Connections . . .View Alarms and Abnormal Condition list . . . . . .View Current Configuration Data

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

References [cont.]

Turn-Up 3EM23955AHAA:OverviewSafety AwarenessElectrostatic Sensitive DevicesProduct Support Information

Maintenance and Trouble Clearing 3EM23956AHAA:Alarm and Abnormal Condition Clearing Procedures Equipment Replacement ProceduresFacility Alarms

Engineering Support Documentation 3EM23957AHAA

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

References [cont.]

MPT-GC (80 GHz Wireless Links) User Manual 3EM24569ADCC:Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment LabelingProduct Information and PlanningNE Management by Software ApplicationInstallationProvisioningMaintenance and Trouble-ClearingLine-UP and Commissioning

MPR-e (Outdoor units: MPT-HC V2 stand-alone) 3EM24570ADAA:Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment LabelingProduct Information and PlanningNE Management by Software ApplicationInstallationProvisioningMaintenance and Trouble-ClearingLine-UP and Commissioning

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

References [cont.]

Indoor: MSS-1c + Outdoor: MPT-HC V2 3EM24571ADAA:Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment LabelingProduct Information and PlanningNE Management by Software ApplicationInstallationProvisioningMaintenance and Trouble-ClearingLine-UP and Commissioning

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-1 Edition 3.03

Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)ANSI · Course Overview1 · 1 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleCourse Overview

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 1Overview

TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2Product

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionallyDocument History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01.10 2008-09-30 Fisher, Sheldon Added to ANSI version for NAR

01.21 2009-01-23 Fisher, Sheldon Revised for R1.1 from R1.0

01.31 2009-03-05 Fisher, Sheldon Final Revision

01.40 2009-06-15 Robinson, Ken Revised to release 2.0

01.41 2009-07-20 Robinson, Ken Revised after review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03 2012-02-07 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.03

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of the 9500 MPR-A radioDescribe the features and advantages of the 9500 MPR-A radioDescribe the 9500 MPR-A radio hardwareDescribe data path from the Access to the transceivers

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio 71.1 Classification of the New Generation Products 81.2 9500 MPR Introduction 91.3 MPR Family 101.4 MPR Family Hardware 111.5 Product Advantages - Multiservice Aggregation Layer 121.6 Product Advantages - Service Awareness 131.7 Product Advantages - Packet Node 141.8 Product Advantages - Service-driven Adaptive Modulation 151.9 Radio Link Aggregation 161.10 Cross-Polarized Interference Cancellation (XPIC) 181.11 Quality of Service 191.12 9500 MPR Network Management Solution 201.13 9500 MPR All Indoor Mount Arrangement 211.14 9500 MPR Split Mount Arrangement 221.15 9500 MPR Components 231.16 Control and Switching Module (CSM-E/Core-E) 241.17 Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH) 251.18 MPT-HL 261.19 MPT-HL RF Connection (RF Filter) 271.20 TDM/PDH Access Modules 281.21 Access Modules 291.22 Radio Interface Modules 301.23 MSS Architecture 311.24 Product Overview 32

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view!

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.1 Classification of the New Generation Products

Alcatel-Lucent microwave product acronyms are now derived as follows:

9500 MPR9500 MPR--AA

Product Family

M = Microwave

P = Packet

R = Radio

A = ANSI

Means radioproduct

5 for Radio Cross-Connect

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.2 9500 MPR Introduction

The 9500 MPR:provides smooth transition of backhaul networks from TDM to IPefficiently transports multimedia traffic since it handles packets natively, while still supporting legacy TDM DS1/DS3 trafficcovers the frequency range from 6-38 GHz

6-38 GHz using the MOD300 Radio Interface (MOD300) card and Outdoor Unit 300 (ODU300)5.8-11 GHz using the Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH) and Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL) transceiverUsing the Microwave Packet Transport Access (MPTACC) and Microwave Packet Transport-High Capacity (MPT-HC)

covers the 80 GHz frequency range using the MPT-GC (71-76 and 81-86 GHz)supports up to 16 RF links for operation on the same or different frequency bands:

up to 6 using the MOD300 and ODU300up to 12 using the EAS/P8ETH and MPT-HL Transceiverup to 12 using the MPTACC and MPT-HC. Each MPTACC supports up to 2 MPT-HCs.up to 16 using a combination of up to 6 MOD300/ODU300s, up to 12 MPT-HL Transceivers, and up to 12 MPTACC/MPT-HCs.

provides up to 16 Gb/s packet switching which creates flexible aggregate capacity sharing across DS1, DS3 and Ethernet traffic300 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.3 MPR Family

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.4 MPR Family Hardware

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.5 Product Advantages - Multiservice Aggregation Layer

Multiservice aggregation layer

The capacity to use Ethernet as a common transmission layer to transport any kind of traffic, independently by the type of interface. Ethernet becomes the convergence layer.

9500 MPR-A aggregates and carries over a COMMON PACKET LAYER: TDM 2G, 3G and IP/Ethernet. This allows sharing of common packet transmission infrastructures, regardless of the nature of carried traffic.

Due to the nature of Ethernet, each service can be discriminated based on several parameters like quality of service.

Mapping different access technologies over Ethernet is achieved by standardized protocols like circuit emulation and pseudo-wire.

R99 - original standard for UMTS WCDMA based networks

HSDPA (High Speed Data Packet Access) - add on to R99/UMTS networks which adds a shared high speed downlink packet channel

ISAM (Indexed Sequential Access Method) - a method for indexing data for fast retrieval

WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) - telecommunications protocol that provides fixed and mobile Internet access

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.6 Product Advantages - Service Awareness

Service awareness

Traffic handling and quality management, queuing traffic according to the type of service assigned, independently by the type of interface.

Service awareness means the ability to discriminate the different traffic types carried over the converged Ethernet stream. The traffic flow can be composed by DS1, DS3, and/or IP/Eth, coming from different sources, and therefore having different requirements.

For instance DS1 traffic from a 3G base stations can carry voice (high priority, real time service) and data (lower priority and possibly non real time with high variability load, such as internet browsing, music download or video streaming).

Service awareness is what allows identifying the traffic types, and in case of the non real time variable bit rate one, optimize the band with overbooking of the radio scarce resource.

PWE3 - Pseudowire emulation edge to edge

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.7 Product Advantages - Packet Node

Packet nodeThe 9500 MPR offers a packet-based Microwave Service Switch (MSS) with a 10 Gigabit backplane to interconnect short-haul and long-haul radio transceivers into a multidirectional, multi-reach packet node that functions as a single network element.

The MSS can also provide Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) and metallic uplinks.

Packets can be transported over Ethernet or PDH in any direction, avoiding service aggregation bottlenecks in terms of capacity, service types and interface types.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.8 Product Advantages - Service-driven Adaptive Modulation

Service-driven adaptive modulationFully exploit the air bandwidth in its entirety by changing modulation scheme according to the propagation

availability and allocate transport capacity, discriminating traffic by different services, only possible in a packet based environment.

Traffic with high priority will always have bandwidth available, like voice (deterministic approach).

Broadband traffic is discriminated by Quality of Service (QoS) dynamically, with modulation scheme changes driven by propagation conditions.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.9 Radio Link Aggregation

Radio LAG is supported on the ODU300, MPT-HC, and MPT-HL, and groups a set of ports so that two network nodes can be interconnected using multiple links to increase link capacity and availability between them.

When aggregated, two or more physical links operate as a single logical link. Traffic capacity is the sum of the individual link capacities.

This doubling, tripling or quadrupling of capacity is relevant where more capacity is required than can be provided on one physical link.

Link aggregation also provides redundancy between aggregated links. If a link fails, its traffic is redirected onto the remaining link, or links.

Radio link aggregation supports the following services:

TDM2TDMTDM2ETHEthernet services

ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.9 Radio Link Aggregation [cont.]

Radio LAG size is restricted to the following:up to three Radio LAG ports per NEup to six MOD300/ODU300 ports per Radio LAG portup to six MPT-HC ports per Radio LAG portup to four MPT-HL ports per Radio LAG port

TMN inband should be cross-connected with only one radio interface of a radio LAG port

To add a radio port to a Radio LAG port, the radio port must not be provisioned as a member to any of the following:cross-connectionVLANport segregationPPP RF enabled on the radio channel

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 17

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.10 Cross-Polarized Interference Cancellation (XPIC)

Cross-Polarized Interference Cancellation (XPIC) provides the ability to operate two links on the same radio channel frequency, one usingvertical polarization and the other using horizontal polarization. Supported on the MPT-HC only

XPIC typically provides 20 dB improvement in polarization discrimination. The actual improvement depends on the native discrimination provided by the antenna alignment and any reduction of this discrimination caused by atmospheric effects (fading)

XPIC supports the following radio configurations:Single 2x(1+0) XPICDouble 2x(1+1) HSB co-channel XPIC4x(1+0) XPIC

XPIC supports the following:Frequency: L6, U6, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18, and 23 GHzModulation: 128 and 256 QAMRadio channel spacing: 30, 40, and 50 MHz

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 18

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.11 Quality of Service

The Quality of Service (QoS) feature assigns the priority for Ethernet packets according to the selected QoS mode. See Figure 6-9 for an overview of the QoS implementationQoS provides eight internal queues to support different traffic priorities. The QoS function assigns Ethernet packets to one of the eight egress traffic queuesQoS classification determines the method the system uses to assign packet priorityQoS classification criterion is assigned at the NE level and applied to all radio and Ethernet portsThe system supports the following QoS classification modes:

DisabledDiffServIEEE 802.1p

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 19

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.12 9500 MPR Network Management Solution

One common user interface for any platform

Supervision of all Alcatel-Lucent transport portfolio and third-party SNMP elements

Interface for easy integration in umbrella systems

1340 INC - Element manager and TDM circuit manager

5620 SAM - Element manager and service manager

Web-based craft terminal - For field engineers and small networks

TSM-8000 - Fault and element manager for microwave

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard protocol for the management of entities in an IP local area network.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 21

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.13 9500 MPR All Indoor Mount Arrangement

Up to 12 radio links per nodeUnprotected: (1+0, 2+0),1+1 HSB, SD, and FD radio protection nodeFrequencies: 5.8 Unlicensed, L6, U6, 10.5, and 11 GHzStatic and adaptive modulationBandwidths: 10 and 30 MHzModulations: 32, 128, and 256 QAM

MSS-4

MPT-HL MSS-8

No physical knobs, dials, or controls

or MSS-1c

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.14 9500 MPR Split Mount Arrangement

or MSS-4

MSS-8

No physical knobs, dials, or controls

ODU300/Antenna

orMPT-HC/AntennaMPT-HC V2/Antenna

Up to 12 radio links per nodeUnprotected, 1+1 HSB, SD, and FD (2+0) radio

protection modeFrequencies: L6, U6, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18, 23, 28, and 38 GHzStatic and adaptive modulationBandwidths: 10, 30, 40, and 50 MHzModulations: 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAM

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.15 9500 MPR Components

Main Equipment Components

Microwave Service Switch Microwave Service Switch -- MSSMSS––88

Microwave Packet Transport, High Power, Long Haul Microwave Packet Transport, High Power, Long Haul -- MPTMPT--HLHL

ODU300/Antenna

Microwave Service Switch Microwave Service Switch -- MSSMSS––44or

MPT-HC/AntennaMPT-HC V2/Antenna

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.16 Control and Switching Module (CSM-E/Core-E)

The Ethernet switch must assure complete interconnections between all the boards connected in 9500 MSS node

Power Supply

UnitController

Flash

RAM

LIU

GigE

Eth

Eth

Eth

Eth

Eth

Eth

EAS/P8ETH

DS1

MOD300

CSM-E/Core-E

EAS/P8ETH

DS3

Slot 8

GigE

4 Ethernet RJ45 2 Ethernet SFP

CRU

GigE

GigEGigE

GigE

GigEETHERNETSWITCH

Control and Switching Module

9500 MPR radio system family supports, in a common platform, PDH DS1, DS3, MOD300, and packet data (Ethernet) applications. The 9500 MPR handles packets natively, which optimizes the use of new access technologies, such as High-Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA), Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) and Evolution-Data Optimized (EV-DO) and facilitates the transport of high-bandwidth services.

Microwave Service Switch (MSS) implements functionalities of grooming, routing, switching and protection, exploiting a packet oriented technology.

Two Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP) ready for 1000Base-LX/SX (single/multi-mode fiber) transceiver port

Gigabit Ethernet serial interfaces

The CSM-E/Core-E card performs the following macro functions:

CSM Controller - Equipment Controller and Physical Machine Controller - to manage all the peripheral modules

Layer 2 Ethernet Switch will perform Cross-Connect function between all the peripherals and Ethernet ports.

Clock Reference Unit (CRU) generates the Network Element Clock, for example, a clock to all 9500 MSS boards

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 25

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.17 Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH)

CSM-E/Core-E Transport and radioperipherals

PSU ControllerFlash

RAM

ETHERNETSWITCH

LIU

GigE

GigE

EAS/P8ETH

MPT

ETHERNETSWITCH

Ethernet AccessEthernet Access

SFP

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.18 MPT-HL

Main Side Spare Side

SFP port Not used PowerPA

0=Disable1=Enable

The Microwave Packet Transport – High Capacity, Long Haul (MPT-HL) is a radio transceiver for long haul applications.

Frequency range: 5.8, 6, and 11 GHz

It features high transmitter output power and an all-indoor design.

The interface to the MPT-HL is a Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) connection (SFP), which when connected to the MSS, supports both traditional TDM and IP microwave solutions.

Unprotected, 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB) with Space Diversity (SD) or Frequency Diversity (FD) Radio Protection

Software (SW) license control

Configurations

Channel MHz QAM Cap. Mb/s Frequency (GHz)10 32 37 5.8

128 52 5.8, L6, U6,10.5, 11

30 32 114 5.8, 10.5, 11

128 160 5.8, L6, 10.5, 11

256 183 5.8, L6, 10.5, 11

When using the indoor transceiver (MPT-HL) shelf with RF filters in lieu of the ODU, the signal is carried to and from the EAS/P8ETH (MSS shelf) by the small form-factor pluggable transceiver (SFP) cable assembly to the MPT-HL Transceiver (MPT-HL shelf).

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 27

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 27

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.19 MPT-HL RF Connection (RF Filter)

RF Filter

Transmit

Receive

Hot Standby RF switch under RF filter

Receive

Setup is for a 1+1 HSB system using a diplexer, with an RF switch for the transmitters and a 1:10 dB coupler on the receivers.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 28

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 28

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.20 TDM/PDH Access Modules

32xDS1

PSU ControllerFlash

RAM

GigE

GigE

EAS/P8ETH

MPT

ETHERNETSWITCH

ETHERNETSWITCH

DS1 Access

2xDS3GigE

DS3 Access

Access CSM-E/Core-E Transport and peripherals radio peripherals

SFP

TDM/PDH Interfaces: 32xDS1, 2xD3

The peripherals are independent modules connecting the CSM-E/Core-E to a set of different external interfaces, through a high speed serial bus.

Available peripherals:

32 x DS1 local access modules

2 x DS3 local access modules

Ethernet packets are interfaced on the CSM-E/Core-E and EAS/P8ETH modules.

The PDH incoming traffic is converted into Ethernet packets and then sent to the Ethernet switch. Packet overhead is optimized before it is to be sent through the air.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 29

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 29

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.21 Access Modules

DS1, DS3, and 10/100/1000 base-T and Gigabit Ethernet interfacesCircuit Emulation Services Over Ethernet (CESoETH) MEF8Point-to-Point VLANFlexible aggregate capacity sharing DS1, DS310 Gigabit Packet Based NodeIEEE 802.1p and Diffserv QoSQueue Management and Flow control ability1+1 Equipment Protection Switching (EPS) available on All Cards

DS1

DS3

The 9500 MPR supports MEF8 structured agnostic emulation TDM services. The MEF8 (Metro Ethernet Forum) Processing Block receives a bit stream from the DS3 interface and performs the following functions:

Packetizes the incoming data to a pre-determined payload size

Encapsulates the payload into a packet format specified by the MEF8 standard for the emulated data type. Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) and Circuit Emulation Services (CES) Control Word headers are added.

CES is a bi-directional service consisting of 2 symmetrical data flows in opposite directions. For each direction of the emulated circuit, there is a pair of CES interworking functions (IWF). A Metro Ethernet Network (MEN)-bounds Ethernet frames and forwards them into the network. The corresponding TDM-bound IWF extracts the TDM data from the Ethernet frames and recreates the TDM service.

Adds the Ethernet header

CESoETH MEF8: Circuit Emulation Services over Ethernet

MEF8: Forum for implementation of the Emulation of PDH Circuits over MEN

Virtual LAN (VLAN) - A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.

IEEE 802.1p (Priority Queuing)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 30

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 30

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.22 Radio Interface Modules

Interfaces between MSS and ODUs

MOD300

MPTACC

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 31

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 31

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.23 MSS Architecture

Cards in a protected configuration must be installed on the same row (main card on the left, spare card on the right)

Module Protection supported:6 unprotected ODU300s (3 protected pairs)12 unprotected MPT-HLs (6 protected pairs)8 MPT-HLs and 4 ODU300s

MSS-8

Slot 1CSM-E/Core-E

Slot 2CSM-E/Core-E

Slot 3EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300

Slot 4EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300

Slot 5EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300

Slot 6EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300

Slot 7EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300

Slot 8EAS/P8ETH, 32xDS1, 2xDS3 , MPTACC, MOD300

Slot

9Fa

n

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 32

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 32

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Introduction to the 9500 MPR-A Radio

1.24 Product Overview

DS1

DS3

Ethernet

TDM DS1

Traditional PDH Radio

DS1

DS3

Ethernet “Data Aware” packetaggregation

Microwave Packet Radio

Packets

9500 MPR-A offers a single packet matrix able to switch, aggregate and handle any of the possible incoming traffic types with virtually no capacity limits (up to 10 GB/s).

Packet platforms fully support TDM

TDM platforms cannot evolve to packet platforms

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 33

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 33

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

Basic concepts of the 9500 MPR-A RadioFeatures and advantages of the 9500 MPR-A Radio:

Multiservice aggregation layerService awarenessPacket node Network-management PlatformsIndoor transceiversODUs

The 9500 MPR-A Radio:Control and Switching Module (CSM-E/Core-E) Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH) module Microwave Packet Transport – High Capacity, Long Haul (MPT-HL)MPT-HL RF Connection (RF Filter)Ethernet interfacesODUsRadio interface modulesAccess modules

Data path from the Access (Ethernet, DS3, and DS1) to the MPT-HLData path from the Access (Ethernet, DS3, and DS1) to the ODU Data path from the Access (Ethernet, DS3, and DS1) to the MPT-HC

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-2 Edition 3.03

Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 34

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product · Overview2 · 1 · 34

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleOverview

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 1MSS HardwareTWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3Product Architecture

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Revised to release 3.03Moehlenkamp, John2012-02-073.03

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2007-07-30 External Consultant First edition

01.10 2008-08-30 Fisher, Sheldon Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.20 2008-10-21 Fisher, Sheldon Revisions following Pilot Class

01.30 2009-01-30 Fisher, Sheldon Update to R1.1

01.31 2009-03-05 Fisher, Sheldon Final Revisions

01 2009-06-23 Robinson, Ken Rel 2.0

01.41 2009-07-23 Robinson, Ken Revised after review

01.42 2009-08-04 Robinson, Ken Revised after 2nd review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Describe the functionality of each card of the MSS-4 and -8Control and Switching Module (CSM-E/Core-E)Ethernet Access Switch (EAS/P8ETH)DS1/P32E1DS1DS3/P2E3DS3MPTACCMOD300AUXFan

Describe the functionality of the +24/-48 Power ConverterDescribe the functionality of the MSS-1cDescribe patch panels (Distributors)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8) 71.1 MSS-8 Overview 81.2 MSS-8 Cards 9

2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4) 112.1 MSS-4 Overview 122.2 MSS-4 Cards 13

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E 153.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card 163.2 CSM-E/Core-E Card Block Diagram 183.3 CSM-E/Core-E Card Status LED 19

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH 214.1 P8ETH/EAS Card 224.2 P8ETH/EAS Card Block Diagram 234.3 P8ETH/EAS Card Status LED 24

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card 255.1 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card 265.2 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card Block Diagram 275.3 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card Status LED 28

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card 296.1 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card 306.2 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card Block Diagram 316.3 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card Status LED 32

7 MPTACC Card 337.1 MPTACC Card 347.2 MPTACC Card Block Diagram 357.3 MPTACC Card Status LED 36

8 MOD300 Card 378.1 MOD300 Card 388.2 MOD300 Card Block Diagram 398.3 MOD300 Card Status LED 40

9 AUX Card 419.1 AUX Card 429.2 AUX Card Status LED 43

10 Fan Card 4510.1 Fan Card 46

11 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter 4711.1 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter 48

12 Power Injector 4912.1 Power Injector 50

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c) 5113.1 MSS-1c 5213.2 MSS-1c Block Diagram 5313.3 MSS-1c Status LED 54

14 Patch Panels 5514.1 DS1 RJ-45 Patch Panel 5614.2 DS1 Tributaries (Protected Pair) 5714.3 DS1 D-Connector Patch Panel 58

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view!

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8)

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-101 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 7

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8)

1.1 MSS-8 Overview

The MSS-8 provides cross-connection, port aggregation, switching, and equipment management.

314 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity per channelConsists of a module cage and backplane which provides nine slots:

2 dedicated slots (1 and 2) for CSM-E/Core-E cards6 slots (3-8) for access or radio cards:

DS1DS3P8ETH/EASMPTACCMOD300AUX (slot 8 only)

1 dedicated slot (9) for the required fan card

1 2

3 49

5 6

7 8

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8)

1.2 MSS-8 Cards

Slots

1 2

3 49

5 6

7 8

Main Spare

P8ETH/EAS or Access/Radio cards

CSM-E/Core-E

Fan

General Rules:

One CSM-E/Core-E card is required (unprotected)

Can be protected with 2nd CSM-E/Core-E

One Flash card is required for every CSM-E/Core-E card

1 to 6 32xDS1 cards

1 to 6 2xDS3 cards

1 to 6 MOD300 cards

Fan card provides Major/Minor relay alarms and a Summary Relay for Major or Minor (usually tied to PDU).

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4)

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-117 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 11

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4)

2.1 MSS-4 Overview

The MSS-4 provides cross-connection, port aggregation, switching, and equipment management.

314 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity per channelConsists of a module cage and backplane which provides five slots:

2 dedicated slots (1 and 2) for CSM-E/Core-E cards2 slots (3 and 4) for access or radio cards:

DS1DS3P8ETH/EASMPTACCMOD300AUX (slot 4 only)

1 dedicated slot (5) for the required fan card

Slots

5

A fully equipped Microwave Service Switch (MSS-8) shelf provides up

to 314 Mb/s full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity per radio carrier channel.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-4)

2.2 MSS-4 Cards

Main Spare

Fan

CSM-E/Core-E

P8ETH/EAS or Access/Radio cards

General Rules:

One CSM-E/Core-E card is required (unprotected)

Can be protected with 2nd CSM-E/Core-E

One Flash card is required for every CSM-E/Core-E card

1 or 2 32xDS1 cards

1 or 2 2xDS3 cards

1 or 2 MOD300 cards

Fan card provides Major/Minor relay alarms and a Summary Relay for Major or Minor (usually tied to PDU).

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-103 and UDS-111 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 15

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

3.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card

CharacteristicsMain system controller (manages communication between all of theperipheral cards)16 Gb/s Ethernet switch for traffic routingSynchronization processorRemovable compact flash card for NE configurationEmbedded web serverSynchronous Ethernet support

Interfaces4x Ethernet 10/100/1000 10Base-T ports (RJ45) (port 4 can be configured for NMS)2x GigE Ethernet SFP ports1x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T (Craft Terminal)1x 2, 5,10 MHz synch-in/synch-out1x mini-USB (not used)

SystemUp to 2 units per shelf. Supports unprotected and 1+1 EPS protection

Gigabit Ethernet serial internal interfaces between CSM-E/Core-E and peripherals

CSM-E/Core-E Macro Functions:

Controller

Layer 2+ Ethernet Switch, VLAN management and MAC based

Ethernet MAC learning

Cross-connect function for PDH and Data payload traffic;

For any “packetized” flow, the switch will be in charge to also manage the Equipment Protection Switching (EPS).

Quality of Service (QoS) management.

Selection of the synchronization clock to be distributed to each plug-in.

The flash card stores the license, equipment software, equipment MIB, and equipment MAC address.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 17

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

3.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card [cont.]

Module SFP transceiver sensitivity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

3.2 CSM-E/Core-E Card Block Diagram

GigE

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:Off – card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredBlinking green – download, booting, or flash card realignment in progressGreen – in service, normal operation, and properly provisionedYellow – in standby, properly provisioned as EPSBlinking red – card mismatchRed – card failure

3 Control and Switching Module/Core-E

3.3 CSM-E/Core-E Card Status LED

StatusNE Abnormal

NE Major alarm

NE Warning alarmNE minor alarm

Ethernet ports 1-4 GigE Ethernet SFP ports 5-6

Craft TerminalIT/TFC

Sync in/out Reset

Link Activity

USB(not used)

The CSM-E/Core-E consists of microprocessor and Ethernet switch circuits. The Ethernet Switch provides a Quality of Service (QOS) mechanism to control all streams.

If QoS is disabled, all traffic inside the switch has the same priority. This means that for each switch port there is only one queue, first in, first out (FIFO)

Three QoS settings in GUI are available as follows:

Disabled

802.1 priorities are set based on IEEE 802.1D-2004 Annex G User Priorities and Traffic Classes that defines seven traffic types and corresponding user priority values.

DiffServ priorities are based on one of eight tags, each identifying one of eight traffic types and corresponding user priority values.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-107 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 21

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

CharacteristicsMSS-to-MPT interface for all indoor configurationsLayer 2 switch, cross-connecting VLAN tagged Ethernet data to/from the addressed MPT-HLTraffic management for up to 4 directions using protected radiosTraffic management for up to 8 directions using not-protected radios requires 2 P8ETH/EAS cards

InterfacesUp to 4 10/100/1000 10Base-T Ethernet portsUp to 4 GigE optical Ethernet SFP ports for MPT-HL or user trafficUp to 4 MPT-HL Transceiver ports

SystemUp to 2 units per shelfSupports unprotected and 1+1 EPS protection

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH

4.1 P8ETH/EAS Card

The P8ETH/EAS card provides four 10/100/1000 10Base-T Ethernet interfaces and four GigE optical Ethernet SFP interfaces to the MPT-HL shelf.

MSS-8 shelf:

Supports three protected pairs of P8ETH/EAS cards or six unprotected P8ETH/EAS cards.

P8ETH/EAS is supported in slots 3-8 for unprotected radio configurations.

In protected radio configurations, a pair of P8ETH/EASs are required.

The main P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slots 3, 5, or7

The protect (spare) P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slots 4, 6, or 8 directly across from the main.

The protect card protects the radio if the main fails.

MSS-4 shelf:

Supports one protected pair of P8ETH/EAS cards or two unprotected P8ETH/EAS cards.

P8ETH/EAS is supported in slots 3 and 4 for unprotected radio configurations.

In protected radio configurations, a pair of P8ETH/EASs are required.

The main P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slot 3.

The protect (spare) P8ETH/EAS is equipped in slot 4 directly across from the main.

The protect card protects the radio if the main fails.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH

4.2 P8ETH/EAS Card Block Diagram

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:Off – card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredBlinking green – download, booting, or flash card realignment in progressGreen – in service, normal operation, and properly provisionedYellow – in standby, properly provisioned as EPSBlinking red – card mismatchRed – card failure

4 Ethernet Access Switch/P8ETH

4.3 P8ETH/EAS Card Status LED

StatusLink

Ethernet ports 1-4 GigE Ethernet SFP ports 5-8

Activity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-105 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 25

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

5.1 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

Characteristics1 to 32 DS1 interfacesMEF-8 SAToP circuit emulationReceives up to 32 DS1 signals, encapsulates into Ethernet packets (IWF), and sends to cross-connections matrixReceives Ethernet packets from the cross-connection matrix, extracts DS1 data, and sends to up to 32 DS1 interfaces

Interfaces32 DS1 ANSI T1.102 – SCSI connectors

System1+1 EPS protection

SAToP: Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet

In a radio link containing a DS3 connection, a maximum of five DS1 connections can be assigned. Additional DS1 connections may be added to separate links that do not contain DS3 connections.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 27

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 27

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

5.2 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card Block Diagram

In the TX direction, the 32xDS1 card processes and encapsulates up to 32 DS1 input lines into 2 Ethernet packets.

In the RX direction, the 32xDS1 card extracts data from the Ethernet data packets and processes the data to provide up to 32 DS1 output lines.

The 32xDS1 access module performs the following macro functions:

Termination of 32 DS1 signals (32 DS1 bi-directional interfaces on the front panel)

Framed DS1 bi-directional alarm management

Encapsulation/Extraction of PDH data flows into/from standard Ethernet packets

Reconstruction of the original PDH Timing

Selection of the Active CSM-E/Core-E

Sending/getting Ethernet packets to the CSM-E/Core-E

Communication with the Controller for provisioning and status report

The module communicates with the CSM-E/Core-E Gigabit Ethernet Serial copper bi-directional interfaces on the backplane.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 28

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 28

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card

5.3 DS1/P32E1DS1 Card Status LED

Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:Off – card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredBlinking green – download, booting, or flash card realignment in progressGreen – in service, normal operation, and properly provisionedYellow – in standby, properly provisioned as EPSBlinking red – card mismatchRed – card failure

Status

DS1 in/outPorts 17-32

DS1 in/outPorts 1-16

There are equipping options for the 32xDS1.

One 32xDS1 module is required in slot 5, 6, 7 or 8 for not protected configurations.

In protected radio configurations, two are required, the main module in slot 5 or 7 and the protect (spare) module in the slot directly across from the main (slot 6 or 8). The protect (spare) 32xDS1 module protects the DS1 stream if the main 32xDS1 module fails.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 29

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-106 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 29

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 30

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 30

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

6.1 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

Characteristics1 or 2 DS3 interfacesMEF-8 SAToP circuit emulationReceives up to 2 DS3 signals, encapsulates into Ethernet packets (IWF), and sends to cross-connections matrixReceives Ethernet packets from the cross-connection matrix, extracts DS3 data, and sends to up to 2 DS3 interfaces

Interfaces4 Mini-BNC connectors

System1+1 EPS protection

In a radio link containing a DS3 connection, a maximum of five DS1 connections can be assigned. Additional DS1 connections may be added to separate links that do not contain DS3 connections.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 31

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 31

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

6.2 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card Block Diagram

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 32

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 32

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card

6.3 DS3/P2E3DS3 Card Status LED

Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:Off – card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredBlinking green – download, booting, or flash card realignment in progressGreen – in service, normal operation, and properly provisionedYellow – in standby, properly provisioned as EPSBlinking red – card mismatchRed – card failure

Status

Out InLine 1

Out InLine 2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 33

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPTACC Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-118 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 33

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 34

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 34

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPTACC Card

7.1 MPTACC Card

CharacteristicsInterface between CSM-E/Core-E and up to 2 MPT-HC/MCMPT-HC EPS/HSB management

Interfaces2 10/100/1000 10Base-T Ethernet ports (RJ45)2 GigE optical Ethernet SFP ports2 DC power supply portsPower Feed over Ethernet (PFoE) function – uses one electrical Ethernet cable to carry Ethernet traffic and power supply inputs

System1+1 EPS/HSB protection

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 35

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 35

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPTACC Card

7.2 MPTACC Card Block Diagram

DigitalProcessing

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 36

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 36

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPTACC Card

7.3 MPTACC Card Status LED

Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:Off – card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredBlinking green – download, booting, or flash card realignment in progressGreen – in service, normal operation, and properly provisionedYellow – in standby, properly provisioned as EPSBlinking red – card mismatchRed – card failure

Ethernet ports 1-2 GigE Ethernet SFP ports 3-4

Status

Power emission status 1 Power emission status 2

DC power port 1 DC power port 2

Link Activity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 37

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 MOD300 Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-104 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 37

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 38

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 38

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 MOD300 Card

8.1 MOD300 Card

CharacteristicsStatic modulation: 32/128/256 QAM (MD300 and MOD300EN)Adaptive modulation: 4/16, 16/64 QAM (MOD300EN only)Converts Ethernet packet data from the CSM-E/Core-E into a modulated IF output signal that is applied to the ODU300Demodulates IF signal from the ODU300, converts demodulated signal into a digital IF signal, encapsulates the digital data into Ethernet packets, and sends the packets to the CSM-E/Core-E

Interfaces1 IF + DC power over COAX cable System1+1 EPS and RPS protection

Warning To prevent serious equipment damage, remove power from MOD300 prior to disconnecting IF cable.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 39

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 39

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 MOD300 Card

8.2 MOD300 Card Block Diagram

Warning When replacing MOD300, always remove the card from the MSS shelfprior to disconnecting IF cable.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 40

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 40

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:Off – card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredBlinking green – download, booting, or flash card realignment in progressGreen – in service, normal operation, and properly provisionedYellow – in standby, properly provisioned as EPSBlinking red – card mismatchRed – card failure

8 MOD300 Card

8.3 MOD300 Card Status LED

StatusPower Emission Status

IF cable to/from ODU300

Warning To prevent serious equipment damage, remove power from MOD300 prior to disconnecting IF cable.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 41

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 AUX Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-120 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 41

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 42

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 42

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 AUX Card

9.1 AUX Card

CharacteristicsProvides 13 housekeeping alarm points:

6 station alarm inputs7 station control outputsuser provisionable alarm labels on a per alarm basisuser provisionable alarm active polarity on a per alarm basis

Interfaces2 64Kbs RS-422/V.11 DCE service channels (for future use)1 housekeeping connector (6 station alarm inputs and 7 station control outputs

Supported in MSS-4 slot 4 and MSS-8 slot 8

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 43

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 43

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:Off – card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredBlinking green – download, booting, or flash card realignment in progressGreen – in service, normal operation, and properly provisionedYellow – in standby, properly provisioned as EPSBlinking red – card mismatchRed – card failure

Note: EOW, Service Channels 1 and 2, and EOW Line Status for future use

9 AUX Card

9.2 AUX Card Status LED

Status

EOW Line StatusService Channel 1 Service Channel 2 Housekeeping

EOW

EOW - Engineering Express Order Wire

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 44

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 44

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 45

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

10 Fan Card

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-110 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 45

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 46

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 46

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Three fan card types supported:Fan 2U card (basic fan card)Fan 2U card with alarmsFan 1U card

Provides forced airflow for MSS cooling

10 Fan Card

10.1 Fan Card

MSS-8 basic fan card

Fan

Batt A

Batt B

External Alarms

Summary

Major

Minor

ACO/LT

MSS-8 fan card with alarms

MSS-4 fan card

Fan, Batt A, Batt B, and ACO/LT not supported

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 47

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

11 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-123 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 47

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 48

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 48

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

11 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter

11.1 +24/-48 Volt Power Converter

The +24/-48 Vdc power converter converts +24 Vdc office power to -48 Vdc for the MSS-4/8:

Resides in slot 4 of the MSS-4 and slot 4, 6, or 8 in the MSS-8. Office power connected to the PDU which connects to the power converter. The output of the power converter (-48 Vdc) is connected to the MSS-4/8 power connector(s). Supports unprotected and protected power arrangements.

Note: When the MPT-HL is powered using +24 VDC, a +24 VDC power converter must be used to connect to the MSS-4/8.

Protect power converter

+24 V in-48 V out +24 V in -48 V out

Main power converter

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 49

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

12 Power Injector

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-122 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 49

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 50

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

12 Power Injector

12.1 Power Injector

The power injector is an indoor device that provides power to up to two MPT-HC V2s through a common Ethernet cable

Inputs:Ethernet trafficPower supply voltage (-48 Vdc)

Outputs Ethernet traffic and DC voltage on a single cable (PFoE)

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 50

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 51

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)

Refer to 9500 MPR-A MSS-1c User Manual, 3EM24571ABAA for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 51

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 52

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 52

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)

13.1 MSS-1c

The MSS-1c provides user port interface, cross-connection, and switching management with up to 314 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet transport capacity per channel

The MSS-1c is a compact IDU that complements the existing portfolio addressing the last mile, the far end application in nodal solution and cost optimized point-to-point applications

Its small size drastically reduces space consumptionSupports one MPT-HC, MPT-HC V2, or MPT-MC ODURadio configuration is 1+0

Interfaces2x Ethernet 10/100/1000 10Base-T ports 2x GigE Ethernet SFP ports1x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T (Craft Terminal)T1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 53

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 53

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)

13.2 MSS-1c Block Diagram

* Indicates not supported

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 54

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 54

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

13 Microwave Service Switch (MSS-1c)

13.3 MSS-1c Status LED

3-4 Ethernet ports 1-2

RJ-45 NMS 1-2Optical

SFP ports 1-2

RJ-45 MPT 1-2

RJ-45 HK and CT

Link Activity

1-8 E1/T1 ports 9-16

Optical SFP port 2, MPT port 2, and house keeping port not supported

StatusNE Warning alarm

NE Major alarm

NE minor alarm

NE Abnormal

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 55

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

14 Patch Panels

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-114 and 115 for more details

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 55

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 56

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 56

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Front

Rear

14 Patch Panels

14.1 DS1 RJ-45 Patch Panel

Converts DS1 card SCSI connectors to 32 RJ-45 connectors

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 57

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 57

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

14 Patch Panels

14.2 DS1 Tributaries (Protected Pair)

DS1 module

MSS shelfMain side Protect side

DS1 RJ-45 Patch Panel 100 Ohm Rear

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 58

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 58

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

14 Patch Panels

14.3 DS1 D-Connector Patch Panel

Converts DS1 card SCSI connectors to 4 37-position DSUB connectorsFront

Rear

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 59

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 59

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

Cards of the MSS-4 and -8:CSM-E/Core-EP8ETH/EASDS1/P32E1DS1DS3/P2E3DS3MPTACCMOD300AUXFan

+24/-48 Power ConverterPower InjectorMSS-1cPatch panels (Distributors)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-3 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 60

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MSS Hardware3 · 1 · 60

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleMSS Hardware

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 2MPT HardwareTWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3Product Architecture

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2009-06-23 Robinson, Ken Rel 2.0

01.41 2009-07-23 Robinson, Ken Revised after review

01.42 2009-08-04 Robinson, Ken Revised after 2nd review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03 2012-02-07 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.03

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Describe the functionality of the Microwave Packet Transport – High Capacity, Long Haul (MPT-HL)

Radio TransceiverMPT-HL to RFMPT-HL from MSS

Radio Configuration and Switching1+0 unprotected1+1 Hot Standby (HSB)Hot Standby Space Diversity (HSSD)Frequency DiversityMPT-HL Characteristics

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL) 71.1 MPT-HL Overview 81.2 Radio Transceiver Cards 91.3 MPT-HL to RF 101.4 Interface to the MPT-HL from MSS-8 11

2 MPT-HL Transceiver 132.1 MPT-HL Transceiver 142.2 MPT-HL Transceiver Status LED 152.3 MPT-HL Transceiver LEDs 16

3 Radio Configuration and Switching 173.1 MPT-HL 183.2 1+0 unprotected 193.3 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB) 203.4 Hot Standby 223.5 Hot Standby Space Diversity (HSSD) 233.6 Space Diversity 243.7 1+1 Frequency Diversity 25

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations 274.1 All Indoor Mount - 1+0 Drop and Insert Repeater 284.2 All Indoor Mount - 1+0 4-Way Junction 294.3 All Indoor Mount - 1+1 HSB Drop and Insert Repeater 304.4 All Indoor Mount - 1+1 HSB 4-Way Junction 31

5 Characteristics 335.1 TDM Circuit Service Profile example 34

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view!

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-102 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 8Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

1.1 MPT-HL Overview

The MPT-HL is a radio transceiver for long haul applications:Provides an all indoor solution when used in conjunction with the 9500 MPR MSS-4 or -8 shelf equipped with EAS/P8ETHsConsists of a module cage and backplane which provides two slots dedicated for 2 MPT-HL transceiver cards

Main Side (Channel 1) Spare Side (Channel 0)

It features high transmitter output power and an all-indoor design.

The MPT-HL shelf provides space for one or two radio transceivers that support 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.

The MPT-HL shelf provides the RF filter and antenna interface.

1 or 2 transceiver modules

Waveguide filters

RF switch and RF cable assemblies

RF Frequency Range: 5.8 GHz, lower and upper 6 GHz, 10.5 GHz, and 11GHz

The microwave unlicensed band link with Ethernet transport may be used for IP Node B backhaul in the city where they want to remove the leased line (sometimes called the last mile backhaul).

The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of eight optional MPT-HL modules; four protected modules, eight non-protected modules, or a combination of protected and non-protected modules.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 9Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

1.2 Radio Transceiver Cards

Main Side (Channel 1) Spare Side (Channel 0)

SFP port Debug Port Battery Power

PA0=Transmit off1=Transmit on

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 10Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

1.3 MPT-HL to RF

RF filter connected to the rear of the MPT-HL

Two views looking down

When using the indoor transceiver (MPT-HL) shelf with RF filters in lieu of the ODU, the signal is carried to and from the Ethernet Access Switch (MSS shelf) by the Small form-factor pluggable transceiver (SFP) cable assembly to the MPT-HL shelf.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 11Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Microwave Packet Transport-Long Haul (MPT-HL)

1.4 Interface to the MPT-HL from MSS-8

MPT-HLMPT-HL

CSM-E/Core-E

EAS/P8ETH

MSS-8

EAS/P8ETH

GigE

SFP

GigE

SFP

MPT-HL

The MPT-HL is a radio transceiver for long haul applications.

MPT-HL features high transmitter output power and an all-indoor design, which is a traditional requirement.

The interface to the MPT-HL is a Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) connection, which when connected to the MSS-8, supports both traditional TDM and IP microwave solutions.

Supports the 5.8 GHz unlicensed band, lower and upper 6 GHz licensed bands, 10.5 GHz band, and 11 GHz band.

The MPT-HL facilitates replacement of existing long haul systems and a convenient migration to IP.

The interface to the MPT-HL is a Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) connection, which when connected to the MSS-8, supports both traditional TDM and IP microwave solutions.

The MPT-HL is enabled automatically when the associated MSS-8 EAS/P8ETH module is enabled.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 12Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 13Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 MPT-HL Transceiver

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, UDS-109 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 14Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 MPT-HL Transceiver

2.1 MPT-HL Transceiver

The MPT-HL Transceiver card is a microprocessor controlled RF transceiver that interfaces the MSS EAS/P8ETH MPT-HL port with the antenna.

The MPT-HL Transceiver manages:transmit and receive frequenciestransmit poweralarmingperformance monitoring

Frequencies (GHz): 5.8 unlicensedL6 and U67810.511

Bandwidths: 5, 10, 30, 40 MHzAdaptive Modulations: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAMStatic Modulations: 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAMAutomatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) support

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 15Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 MPT-HL Transceiver

2.2 MPT-HL Transceiver Status LED

Card status LED indicates the status of the printed circuit board:Off – card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredBlinking green – download or booting in progressGreen – in service, normal operation, and properly provisionedYellow – in standby, properly provisionedBlinking green/red – properly provisioned. TX or RX equipment or signal fault. EPS or RPS currently in-service/active. Traffic is probably affectedBlinking yellow/red – properly provisioned. TX or RX signal fault. EPS and RPS currently in standby. Traffic may be affectedBlinking red – no communication between MPT-HL Transceiver and EAS/P8ETHRed – card failure Status

Link Power Emission Status

PABatt PowerActivity

Craft TerminalSFP port

SFP Port -Connection to EAS Card in MSS-8 Shelf

Link, Activity - Ethernet Link LED(s)

Craft Terminal- Not used. Engineering Debug Port

Power Emission Status- RF Power Out

Battery Power- 48 Vdc connection

PA- 0 = PA OFF; PA-1 = PA ON

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 16Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 MPT-HL Transceiver

2.3 MPT-HL Transceiver LEDs

Link (L) Off Link DownGreen Link Up

Activity (A) Off No Tx/Rx activityBlinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

Power Emission Status (M) LEDOff No output power (e.g.: TPS in standby, software booting, or

FPGA download in progress)Green Normal output powerYellow Forced squelch enabled on craft terminal Red Abnormal output power

Activity

Link

S - Module Status

- Power Emission Status

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 17Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 17

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 18Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.1 MPT-HL

Rx

Tx

RF Filter

To Antenna

Front

Rear

The CSM-E/Core-E platform, with multiplexing and symmetrical cross-connection functions, is able to manage different radio directions, with the possibility to add-drop tributaries in case of local PDH or Ethernet accesses.

The 9500 MPR-A supports up to 12 RF links for operation on the same or different frequency bands using the MSS-8 Unit.

Supports the 5.8 GHz unlicensed band, lower and upper 6 GHz licensed bands, 10.5 GHz band, and 11 GHz band.

9500 MPR-A supports a mix of non-protected, protected, or diversity operation for single link, repeater, or star radio configurations.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 19Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.2 1+0 unprotected

MPT-HL

RF Filter rear view1+0 (Non-Standby)

The MPT-HL will support multiple protection configurations to allow the customer to select the right mix of cost and reliability for a particular application.

The 1+0 configuration means that the traffic is unprotected.

In the 1+0 configuration each MPT-HL functions independently of the other MPT-HL instances in the system.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 20Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.3 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB)

MPT-HL

RF Filter rear viewHot Standby 1:10 coupler

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 21Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 21

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.3 1+1 Hot Standby (HSB) [cont.]

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 22Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.4 Hot Standby

MPT-HL Spare

MPT-HL Main

Control Signal

Tx Switch

RF Filter

Rx

Rx

Tx

Tx

1:10

Hot Standby

1+1 Hot Standby (HSB) Single Antenna (SA)

This configuration requires one frequency and one antenna.

Each MPT-HL Transceiver receives a signal from the antenna through a coupler.

Each MPT-HL Transceiver provides a transmit signal to a transmit relay switch.

The transmit relay will select one of the MPT-HL Transceivers as the source of the transmit signal sent to the coupler. The transmit relay is controlled by a General Purpose I/O (GPIO) pin on the spare MPT-HL Transceiver.

The transmit relay will default to the main instance if the spare is down.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 23Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.5 Hot Standby Space Diversity (HSSD)

Front view

Rear view

RF Filter

Hot Standby with Space Diversity

RF Filter

MPT-HL

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 24Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.6 Space Diversity

MPT-HL Main

MPT-HL Spare

Rx

Rx

Tx

Tx

Waveguide

WaveguideFilter

Filter

Space Diversity

Space Diversity configuration requires one frequency and two antennas.

Each MPT-HL Transceiver receives a signal from a dedicated antenna.

Only one of the antennas is used for transmission.

Each MPT-HL Transceiver provides a transmit signal to a transmit relay switch.

The transmit relay selects one of the MPT-HL Transceivers as the source of the transmit signal sent to themain antenna.

The transmit relay is controlled by a GPIO pin on the spare MPT-HL Transceiver.

The transmit relay defaults to the main instance if the spare is down.

By spacing the two antennas a few wavelengths apart, the two MPT-HL Transceivers will experience uncorrelated fading and can switch between the received signals in a hitless manner to provide a greater degree of availability over the radio link.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 25Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 25

1+1 Frequency Diversity

Frequency Diversity configuration requires two frequencies and one antenna.

Each MPT-HL Transceiver receives a signal from the same antenna.

Each MPT-HL Transceiver provides a transmit signal to the same antenna.

Frequency Diversity transmits two different frequencies and receives two different frequencies from the remote-radio. It will select the best signal received.

Frequency Diversity relies on the fact that fading is different at different frequencies:

The transmit relay will select one of the MPT-HL Transceivers as the source of the transmit signal sent to the main antenna.

By using different frequencies, the two MPT-HL Transceivers will experience uncorrelated fading and can switch between the received signals in a hitless manner to provide a greater degree of availability over the radio link.

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Radio Configuration and Switching

3.7 1+1 Frequency Diversity

Transmit Filter

Transmit Filter

Receive Filter

Receive Filter

EAS/P8ETH

EAS/P8ETH

CSM

TDM

Ethernet

Best received signal used

MPT-HL Main

MPT-HL Spare

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 26Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 27Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 27

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 27

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

Refer to 9500 MPR Product Information, 3EM23952AHAA, 9500 MPR General System Description

for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 28Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 28

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 28

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

4.1 All Indoor Mount - 1+0 Drop and Insert Repeater

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 29Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 29

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 29

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

4.2 All Indoor Mount - 1+0 4-Way Junction

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 30Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 30

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 30

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

4.3 All Indoor Mount - 1+1 HSB Drop and Insert Repeater

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 31Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 31

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 31

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 All Indoor Mount Configurations

4.4 All Indoor Mount - 1+1 HSB 4-Way Junction

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 32Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 32

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 32

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 33Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 33

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 33

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Characteristics

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 34Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 34

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 34

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Characteristics

5.1 TDM Circuit Service Profile example

Note: For additional modulation options, refer to the documentation

Frequency BW

Channel BW

MHz

Modulation

QAM

Maximum Radio Link

or Eth Capacity

Mb/s

Equivalent CapacityTDM2ETH

Ethernet Link

DS1

Equivalent Capacity

TDM2TDM

Radio Link

DS1

5.8 10 32 37.32 18 22

5.8, 6L, 6U, 11 5 128 25.8

5.8, 6L, 6U, 11 10 128 52.64 25 31

5.8 30 32 114.22 55 67

5.8, 6L, 6U, 11 30 128 160.17 78 95

5.8, 6L, 6U, 11 30 128 183.30 89 108

The table summaries the relations among Radio capacity, channeling scheme, and modulation (Static Modulation).

The relationship of these parameters will be covered again when we discuss the channel bandwidth, modulation and capacity settings using the GUI.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 35Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 35

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 35

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

Functionality of the MPT-HLRadio TransceiverMPT-HL to RFMPT-HL from MSS-8

Radio Configuration and Switching1+0 unprotected1+1 Hot Standby (HSB)Hot Standby Space Diversity (HSSD)Frequency Diversity

MPT-HL Characteristics

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 36Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 36

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 36

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 37Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 37

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 37

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 19500 MPR Hardware Orientation

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-4 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 38Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 38

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Product Architecture · MPT Hardware3 · 2 · 38

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleMPT Hardware

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 2

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2007-07-30 External Consultant First edition

01.10 2008-08-30 Fisher, Sheldon Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.20 2008-10-21 Fisher, Sheldon Revisions following Pilot Class

01.30 2009-01-30 Fisher, Sheldon Update to R1.1

01.31 2009-03-05 Fisher, Sheldon Final Revisions

01.40 2009-06-15 Robinson, Ken Revised for release 2.0

01.41 2009-07-27 Robinson, Ken Revised after review

01.42 2009-08-04 Robinson, Ken Revised after 2nd review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03 2012-02-07 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.03

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 4

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 5

Page

1 Outdoor Unit 300 7 1.1 ODU300 8 1.2 ODU300 Block Diagram 9 1.3 ODU300 External Connectors 10 1.4 ODU300 and Antenna 12 1.5 ODU300 Mounting Options 13

2 Microwave Packet Transport - High Capacity (MPT-HC) 15 2.1 MPT-HC 16 2.2 MPT-HC Block Diagram 17 2.3 MPT-HC External Connectors 18 2.4 MPT-HC and Antenna 19 2.5 MPT-HC Interfaces 20

3 Microwave Packet Transport - High Capacity V2 (MPT-HC V2) 21 3.1 MPT-HC V2 22 3.2 MPT-HC V2 Block Diagram 23 3.3 MPT-HC V2 Interfaces 24

4 Split Mount Configurations 27 4.1 Stand-Alone Shelf 28 4.1 Split Mount - 1 + 0 Terminal 28 4.2 Split Mount - 1 + 0 Drop and Insert Repeater 29 4.3 Split Mount - 1 + 1 Drop and Insert Repeater 30 4.4 Split Mount - 1 + 0 4-Way Junction 31 4.5 Split Mount - Single 2 + 0 XPIC 32 4.6 Split Mount - Double 1 + 1 HSB Co-channel XPIC 33

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 6

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 7

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 8 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 8

The ODU300 includes a waveguide antenna port, Type-N female connector for the ODU cable, BNC female connector (with captive protection cap) for RSSI access, and a grounding stud.

The ODUs are designed for direct antenna attachment via a mounting collar supplied with the antenna.

ODU polarization is determined by the position of a polarization rotator fitted within the mounting collar.

A remote ODU mounting kit is available as an option. These may be used to connect an ODU to a standard antenna, or to a dual-polarized antenna for co-channel link operation.

ODUs are fixed for Tx High or Tx Low operation.

Where two ODUs are to be connected to a single antenna for hot-standby or frequency diversity configurations, a direct-mounting coupler is used.

ODUs are frequency-band specific, but within each band are capacity-independent up to their design maximums.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 9 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 9

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 10 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 10

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 11 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 11

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 12 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 12

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 13 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 13

The ODU mounts directly to an Antenna: Non-protected.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 14 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 14

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 15

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 16 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 16

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 17 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 17

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 18 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 18

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 19 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 19

RF couplers are available for equal or unequal loss operation:

• Equal loss is nominally 3 dB

• Unequal loss is nominally 1/10 dB.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 20 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 20

RF couplers are available for equal or unequal loss operation:

• Equal loss is nominally 3 dB

• Unequal loss is nominally 1/10 dB.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 21

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 22 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 22

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 23 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 23

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 24 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 24

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 25 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 25

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 26 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 26

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 27 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 27

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 28 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 28

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 29 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 29

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 30 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 30

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 31

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 32 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 32

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 33 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 33

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 34 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 34

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 35 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 35

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 36

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 37

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 38 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 38

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 39 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 39

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved. TWT42013-5 Edition 3.03

Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 40 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 40

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 1Operator GUI Interface

TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4NE Operation

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Revised to release 3.03Moehlenkamp, John2012-02-073.03

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2007-07-30 External Consultant First edition

01.10 2008-09-30 Fisher, Sheldon Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.20 2008-10-21 Fisher, Sheldon Revisions after Pilot Class

01.30 2009-01-30 Fisher, Sheldon Upgrade to R1.1

01.31 2009-03-05 Fisher, Sheldon Final Revisions

01.40 2009-06-16 Robinson, Ken Revised to release 2.0

01.41 2009-07-20 Robinson, Ken Revised after review

01.42 2009-08-04 Robinson, Ken Revised after 2nd review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Activate the Network Element Overview (NEtO) applicationConnect to a 9500 MPR-A either via a network connection or directly to the NMS (Craft) terminalUse the menus and tabs to observe and configure the 9500 MPR-A Network Elements

Tool BarsAlarm & State PanelsEquipment TabProtection TabSynchronization TabConnections TabMPT-HL SettingsRadio Modem SettingsLocal ConfigurationNTP Configuration

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 Network Element Overview (NEtO) 71.1 Activate NEtO 81.2 NEtO Main Screen 9

1.2.1 Site Database and Viewing Options 101.2.2 NEtO Main Screen - Alarm Supervision 11

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method 132.1 Connect to NE - Direct Method 142.2 NE Main View 17

3 Connect to NE - Database Method 193.1 Create Favorite NEs Database 203.2 Connect to NE - Database Method 223.3 NE Main View 27

4 Main View 294.1 NE Main View 304.2 NE Main View - Tool Bars 314.3 NE Main View - Severity Alarm Synthesis Area 324.4 NE Main View - Domain Alarm Synthesis Area 334.5 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panels 344.6 NE Main View - Main Menu Bar 364.7 NE Main View Tab Windows - Equipment Tab 374.8 NE Main View Tab Windows - Protection Schemes Tab 394.9 Protection Scheme Parameters - Restoration Criteria 404.10 NE Main View Tab Windows - Synchronization Tab 414.11 NE Main View Tab Windows - Connections Tab 424.12 NE Main View Tab Windows - Connections Tab - Help 43

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel 455.1 Equipment View - MPT-HL 465.2 Equipment View - MPT-HL - Settings 475.3 Equipment View - MPT-HL 485.4 Equipment View - Settings Tab 495.5 Equipment View - Settings Tab (Presetting Mode) 505.6 Equipment View - Settings Tab 525.7 Equipment View - Settings Tab - Alarm Profile 53

6 MOD300 Radio Channel 556.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem 566.2 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Adaptive Modulation Mode 576.3 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode 586.4 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode with ATPC 596.5 Radio Modem Measurements Tab 606.6 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic 61

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel 637.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem 647.2 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Adaptive Modulation Mode 657.3 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode 667.4 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode with ATPC 677.5 Radio Modem Measurements Tab 687.6 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic 69

8 Configuration Menu 718.1 Configuration Menu 728.2 Configuration Menu - NE Time Configuration 738.3 Network Configuration - Local Configuration 748.4 Network Configuration - NTP Configuration 768.5 Network Configuration - IP Static Routing Configuration 778.6 Network Configuration - OSPF Area Configuration 798.7 Network Configuration - Routing Information 81

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view! Page

8.8 Alarm Severities 828.9 Configuration Menu - System Settings 848.10 DiffServ - Class of Service 868.11 Configuration Menu - Cross-Connections 878.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration 898.13 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Ring Instance 938.14 Configuration Menu - LAG Configuration 958.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration 98

8.15.1 Queue Scheduling 998.15.2 Queue Size 1008.15.3 Classification 1018.15.4 802.1p 1028.15.5 DiffServ 103

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration 1048.17 Configuration Menu - VLAN Configuration 1088.18 Configuration Menu - Profiles Management 1098.19 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Features Shell 1108.20 Current Configuration View 111

9 Supervision Menu 1139.1 Supervision Menu 1149.2 Supervision Menu - Access State 1159.3 Supervision Menu - Restart NE 1169.4 Supervision Menu - Restart MPT 1179.5 Supervision Menu - MIB Management 1189.6 MIB Management - Backup 1199.7 MIB Management - Restore/Activate 1209.8 MIB Management - Remove file 1219.9 Supervision Menu - SW License 1229.10 Supervision Menu - SW License Window 123

10 Software Download Menu 12510.1 SW Download Menu 12610.2 SW Download Menu - Server Access Configuration 12710.3 SW Download Menu - Init SW Download 12810.4 SW Download Menu - SW Status 12910.5 SW Download Menu - SW Status Detail 130

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Network Element Overview (NEtO)

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-100 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 8Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Ensure computer is connected to Craft Terminal, directly or through a network

Double-click the icon for the NEtO application:The NEtO Main Screen opens:

1 Network Element Overview (NEtO)

1.1 Activate NEtO

Discovery of local NE by Network Element Overview (NEtO)

A simple two-way hand shake discovery protocol is implemented between NEtO application and local connected NEs. Local connected Network Element (NE) means NE connected to NEtO using Local Ethernet Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) port through a point-to-point Ethernet cable or Ethernet network. In any case the NE and NEtO belong to the same IP subnet.

The discovery protocol made the following information available to NEtO regarding the local connected NE:

Local IP Address

NE Type

NE Version

NE Site Name

Selecting the NE, NEtO can automatically start the supervision without the need to provision the Local IP address manually.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 9Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Network Element Overview (NEtO)

1.2 NEtO Main Screen

2

1

Network Element Information

The Main Screen is the starting point of the craft terminal application.

Only one NE can be managed in a NEtO session.

When you are connected to an NE, you get an Alarm overview.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 10Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1.2 NEtO Main Screen

1.2.1 Site Database and Viewing Options 1

Minimize main view Maximize main view

Create new list of favorite NEs

Open list of current favorite NEs

Open file containing list of favorite NEs. Select file to use.

Site Database

You can manage and organize a list of available NEs in a table on a server or a local PC.

All data related to all NEs added to the list is saved in a custom format called “.NETO”.

Your can have your own NEs lists repository, containing all .NETO files that you produced with NEs information inside.

There is no default location for the database. You can save these anywhere, but be sure you remember where you put it.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 11Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1.2 NEtO Main Screen

1.2.2 NEtO Main Screen - Alarm Supervision

Default Alarm colors

Major alarm

Minor alarm

Warning alarm

Indeterminate

No Active alarms

2

Green - ongoing supervisionRed - NE link not workingGray - supervision not active

(Also appears in System Tray)

Displays Summary of all Active Alarms for this NE

Icon in system tray displays highest alarm level in NE

Icon in System Tray (highest alarm level in NE)

Gray: Supervision is not active

Red: Highest alarm is Critical

Orange: Highest alarm is Major

Yellow: Highest alarm is Minor

Cyan: Highest alarm is Warning

Blue: Highest alarm is Indeterminate

Green: No Active Alarms

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 12Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-100 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 14Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

2.1 Connect to NE - Direct Method

At the initial screen, select the NE you want to connect to:

Enter the IP Address of the NE1

Click OK to select the IP address2

You can manage only one Network Element (NE) in a NEtO session.

To connect to a NE, enter the NE IP Address or Domain Name System (DNS) name in the address box.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 15Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

2.1 Connect to NE - Direct Method [cont.]

Click Show to connect to the NE3

Alarm summary for selected NE

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 16Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

2.1 Connect to NE - Direct Method [cont.]

Enter username4

Enter login password5

Click Login6

Login

Type your username - must not be more than 20 characters.

Type your password - must not be less than eight (8) or more than 20 characters and must be composed of ASCII characters set (UPPER/lower case, numeric and special characters).

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 17Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 17

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Connect to NE - Direct Method

2.2 NE Main View

The Main View Area manages all domains from which the operator can start. It is organized with tabbed window. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with the tab shown on the top.

TabsEach tab represents a set of functions:

Equipment (manage the equipment configuration)Protection Schemes (manage the protection schemes in 1+1 configuration only)Synchronization (manage the synchronization)Connections (manage the cross-connections)

Each tab window consists of three areas:Resource-Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the NE.Resource-List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View or Graphical View.

Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabular element is shown.Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource. As default, no graphical element is shown.

Resource-Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area. As a default, no entry view is displayed as a consequence of the default behavior of the Resource List area.Navigation from main view to multiple main views (related to the equipment components) can be done by double-clicking the appropriate card image

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 18Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-127 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 20Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.1 Create Favorite NEs Database

Click new file icon to create new favorite NEs database file

1

Click Get Current to copy NE info from IP Address field and adds it to the database

2

You can create a list of addresses for your favorite 9500 MPR locations.

Select icon to create a new list of favorite Network Elements (NE).

Select Get Current.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 21Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 21

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.1 Create Favorite NEs Database [cont.]

Click Save3

Enter database file name4

Click Save5

Click OK6

NE selections can be stored in a database with the extension .neto.

The file can be located anywhere on your local machine, or on a network server.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 22Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method

Click Open3

Enter database file name2

Click icon to open a saved database1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 23Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method [cont.]

Adds new line for direct entry of NE information

Copies NE info from selected line of table into IP Address field

Closes database window

Deletes selected NE info from database

“Get Current” button is used to read information from main NEtO view. This operation will always add a new line in NE list table with all information related to currently supervised NE. This happens even though a NE with corresponding IP address is still present in the list.

“Set Current” button, filling main NEtO view IP address with datum from selected NE. The operator must previously select a valid line in NEs table and then click on “Set Current” button so filling NEtO main window data. This operation will automatically close the NE list window but does not start supervision on set NE.

“New” button, adding a new NE from scratch. This allows the operator to fill the “IP Address” field only with its needed NE.

“Remove” button, removes a selected NE.

“Save” button, saves table list in a specified file.

To close this window click on “Close” button.

All data are saved in a custom XML format called “neto” and this structured file will contain all data shown in above figure related to NEs added to the list.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 24Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method [cont.]

Click Set Current5

Select desired NE4

Once you build and open the file with the database, you may select the NE to open by clicking ‘Set Current’.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 25Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 25

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method [cont.]

Selected NE IP address

Click OK to select IP address6

Click Show to connect to the NE7

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 26Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.2 Connect to NE - Database Method [cont.]

Enter username8

Enter login password9

Click Login10

Login

Type your username - must not be more than 20 characters.

Type your password - must not be less than eight (8) or more than 20 characters and must be composed of ASCII characters set (UPPER/lower case, numeric and special characters).

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 27Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 27

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 27

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Connect to NE - Database Method

3.3 NE Main View

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 28Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 28

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 28

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 29

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 29

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, WebEML Craft Terminal Reference

Guide for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 30Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 30

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 30

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.1 NE Main View

ResourceTree Area

ResourceList Area

Resource Detail Area

Resource-Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the NE.

Displays all the available resources of the Radio NE in a tree structure.

Each tree node consists of two symbols. The first symbol indicates the state of the structure, for example, if the symbol has a "+" the tree can be expanded to a lower level. The tree structure can be collapsed if the symbol is a "-". Finally, if there is no symbol, the node represents a leaf. The second symbol is the graphical representation of the resource.

The user must select the resource by clicking with the mouse to carry out an action that depends on the type of click and the Resource Detail Area related to the selected element that is displayed. Each resource listed may be selected by using the mouse with a single or double mouse click.

Resource-List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View or Graphical View.

Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource.

Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource.

Resource-Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 31Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 31

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 31

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.2 NE Main View - Tool Bars

Main Menu BarMain Tool Bar

The Main View tool bars and icons:

Main Menu Bar:Pull-down Menus for management of radio functions.

Main Tool Bar Icons:

This area contains a selection of handy quick-access buttons for common features.

Left arrow - previous screen

Zoom

Right arrow - next screen

Summary Block Diagram view

Current Configuration View

Cross-Connections View

Segregated Ports View

Ethernet Ring Configuration View

LAG Configuration View

QoS Configuration View

XPIC Configuration

Auxiliary Cross-Connections

VLAN Configuration

Wireless Transmission Performance Monitoring (WTPM) Tool

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 32Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 32

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 32

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.3 NE Main View - Severity Alarm Synthesis Area

Severity Alarm Synthesis Area

Severity Alarm Synthesis Area with no alarms reported

Severity Alarm Synthesis Area

Severity of the different alarms in the NE as well as the number of current alarms.

Each alarm severity is represented by an alarm icon situated in the top left hand corner of the view.

These alarm icons are constantly represented on the different Equipment views (NE view, Module view or Port view) so that the operator is always aware of the alarms occurring in the system.

The shape and color of these icons indicate the number and type of alarms on the NE.

An alarm icon with a circle and number inside it indicates that alarms of the number and the type defined by the icon are occurring.

An alarm icon with a rectangle inside it indicates that no alarms of the type defined by the icon are occurring.

An alarm icon grayed out indicates that incoming alarm notification have been inhibited.

Alarm colors

Red: Critical alarm (C)

Orange: Major alarm (M)

Yellow: Minor alarm (m)

Cyan: Warning alarm (W)

White: Indeterminate (I) Not operative

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 33Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 33

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 33

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Domain Alarm Synthesis AreaEXT - External Point (Housekeeping alarm). EQP - Equipment alarmTRS - Transmission alarm

4 Main View

4.4 NE Main View - Domain Alarm Synthesis Area

Domain Alarm Synthesis Area

Domain Alarm Synthesis Area with no alarms reported

Alarm Functionality

The Craft Terminal provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the severity of the different alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms.

There are five different alarm severity levels. These different levels are associated with colors (green in normal condition).

Red: Critical alarm (C)

Orange: Major alarm (M)

Yellow: Minor alarm (m)

Cyan: Warning alarm (W)

White: Indeterminate (I) Not operative

The shape of the alarm icons in the alarm panel gives an indication of alarm occurrence.

An alarm icon with a rectangle inside indicates that no alarms of the type defined by the icon are occurring.

An alarm icon with a circle inside it (and a number at the bottom of the icon) indicates that alarms of the number and the type defined by the icon are occurring.

An alarm icon grayed out indicates that a spontaneous incoming alarm notification has been inhibited.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 34Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 34

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 34

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.5 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panels

Local Access: Granted

Operation State Enabled: Communications Link Up

Supervision State: Supervised

OS: Not Connected

NTP Protocol Enabled: Both Servers Reachable

Abnormal Conditions: False

Status Control Area

Status Control Area

LOCK: Local Access state: indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.Green: Indicates that the terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted).

Cyan: Indicates that the terminal does not have the OS permission to manage the NE (denied).COM: Operational state: indicates whether or not the communication with the OS is established.

Green: SDH service link upRed: SDH service link down

SUP: Supervision state: indicates whether or not the NE is under OS supervision. Green: NE is under supervision.

Orange: NE is not under supervision.

OS: OS isolation.

Green: NE is not managed by the 1353SH.

Cyan: NE is managed by the 1353SH.

NTP Server Status

Orange: NTP function is disabled.

Green: Loss of communication with Main and Standby servers.

Cyan: NE is communicating with NTP Main or Standby servers.AC: Indicates whether some abnormal conditions have been recognized. The operator can visualize them with the

Diagnosis-> Abnormal condition list menu.Green: Normal operating condition

Cyan: Detection of an Abnormal operative condition

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 35

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 35

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Notes page

Switch to notes view!LOCAL ACCESS STATE: Indicates operational status for the terminal to manage the NE

Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted)

Indicates the Craft Terminal requested OS permission to manage the NE (requested)

Indicates that the Craft Terminal does not have the OS permission to manage the NE (denied)

COMMUNICATION:Indicates the operational status of the connection between the NE and the OS (SDH service link)

Indicates the “Enable” operational state of the connection between NE and the terminal (SDH service link up)

Indicates the “Disable” operational state of the connection between NE and the terminal (SDH service link down)

SUPERVISION:Indicates whether the NE is under OS supervision

Indicates the NE is under supervision

Indicates the NE is not under supervision. Used in the OS

OPERATIONAL SYSTEM ISOLATION:Indicates operational status of the NE to be managed by the 1353SH

Indicates the User State is unblocked

Indicates the User State is blocked

NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL SERVER STATUS: Indicates the operational status of the Network Time Protocol

NTP server disabled

NTP server enabled, loss of communication with both the Main and Standby servers

NTP server enabled, NE is communicating with NTP Main and/or Standby servers

ABNORMAL CONDITION: Indicates the status of AbnormalConditions present on the NE

Normal operating condition

Detection of an Abnormal operative condition exist on the NE

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 36Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 36

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 36

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.6 NE Main View - Main Menu Bar

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 37Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 37

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 37

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.7 NE Main View Tab Windows - Equipment Tab

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 38Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 38

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 38

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.7 NE Main View Tab Windows - Equipment Tab [cont.]

MPT-HL icon

ODU300 icon

MPT-XX icon

Icons on front of module:

Active

Stand-by

Cross-connected

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 39Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 39

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 39

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.8 NE Main View Tab Windows - Protection Schemes Tab

Manual= switches between main and spareLockout= forces to main (Channel 1)Forced= forces to spare (Channel 0)

Equipment Protection Switching

Equipment protection is used to provide protection to a service implemented on one or several equipment.

Equipment protection is performed by switching the equipment supporting the protected service when this equipment fails to protection (or spare) equipment capable of supporting the same service.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 40Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 40

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 40

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.9 Protection Scheme Parameters - Restoration Criteria

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 41Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 41

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 41

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.10 NE Main View Tab Windows - Synchronization Tab

Normal OperationThe master can be provisioned to get sync clock from:

internal local oscillator (Free Run Local Oscillator)

DS1 Port

external clock (Sync-In Port) from customer provided equipment

The slave radios can be provisioned to receive the sync clock from one of two sources:

clock recovered by the radio receiver (Radio Port)

sync clock from another radio in the network (Sync-In Port)

Normally at a repeater, the sync clock is received over the RF path and recovered by the radio receiver.

A typical slave terminal uses the clock from an adjacent radio.

Sync Switching A revertive switching feature is a provisioning option that restores the sync clock to the original source when the alarm on the primary source is cleared.

If revertive switching is not selected, the secondary sync source will continue to provide sync clock, and if the secondary source fails, must be manually switched to the primary source.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 42Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 42

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 42

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.11 NE Main View Tab Windows - Connections Tab

Select Help to see Connection tab fieldsSelect Help to see Connection tab fields

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 43Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 43

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 43

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Main View

4.12 NE Main View Tab Windows - Connections Tab - Help

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 44Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 44

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 44

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 45

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 45

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-109 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 46Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 46

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 46

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.1 Equipment View - MPT-HL

Provision MPT

Note: The MPT-HL is automatically enabled when the MSS EAS/P8ETH module is enabled.

Select the MSS MPT-HL Dir#-Ch# in the Resource Tree area.

The selected name will be highlighted in blue.

This selection should also highlight the MSS-8 MPT-HL icon in blue in the resource List Area.

Select the MSS MPT-HL icon and the RF Settings screen will display.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 47Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 47

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 47

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.2 Equipment View - MPT-HL - Settings

Provision MPT-HL Direction and Channel

Select the MSS-8 MPT-HL Dir#-Ch# in the Resource Tree area. The selected name will be highlighted in blue. This selection should also highlight the MSS-8 MPT-HL icon in blue in the resource List Area.

Single left click the blue MSS-8 MPT-HL icon and the Protection Settings screen will display.

Select the Protection Type.

Select Protect Port.

Click Apply.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 48Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 48

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 48

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.3 Equipment View - MPT-HL

Double-click MPT-HL

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 49Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 49

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 49

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.4 Equipment View - Settings Tab

Example

Channel Bandwidth Modulation Radio Capacity

Ethernet

10 MHz 128 QAM 52.64 Mb/s

30 MHz 32 QAM 114.22 Mb/s

30 MHz 128 QAM 160.17 Mb/s

30 MHz 256 QAM 183.30 Mb/s

Select the slot in the MSS-8 Radio module to provision in the Resource Tree area. The selected name will be highlighted in yellow. This selection should also highlight the MSS-8 Radio module in blue on the graphical representation in the Resource List Area.

Double-click the blue MSS-8 Radio Module and the Settings Tab will display for the slot selected.

From the Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select desired channel spacing (10, 30, or 40 MHz).

From the Modulation drop-down menu, select modulation scheme (32, 128, or 256 QAM).

Select the Channel #1 shifter frequency, from the channel #1 Shifter (MHz) drop-down menu, select the TX (Go) and RX (Return) Separation Frequency.

Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range.

The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.

Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 50Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 50

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 50

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

XPIC configuration – Radio Channel XPIC configuration vertical or horizontal

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.5 Equipment View - Settings Tab (Presetting Mode)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 51Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 51

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 51

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.5 Equipment View - Settings Tab (Presetting Mode) [cont.]

PPP RF If enabled, the PPPoE interface is active and the IP address of the remote connected NE will appear in the Remote Address field.

The Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary 512 Kbit/s channel. Through the PPPoE interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station.

In the Routing IP Protocol field, click on the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select the associated OSPF area.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 52Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 52

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 52

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Enable ATPCor

Set RPTC values1

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.6 Equipment View - Settings Tab

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC)

If (automatic) ATPC is enabled the screen will replace (static) RTPC fields with ATPC fields.

When Rx power is equal to low remote ATPC Rx Threshold the ATPC algorithm starts to operate.

ATPC must be off to perform Fade Margin tests.

The ATPC function automatically increases or decreases the transmit output power upon request from the opposite terminal. The opposite terminal constantly monitors Receive Signal Level (RSL), receive signal quality, and aggregate Bit Error Rate (BER) of the receive signal.

When ATPC is enabled, the transmit output will remain at it's lowest level until a fade occurs (or a receive circuit alarm is detected). When the change in RSL is detected at the receive end, a command is sent to the transmit end to increase power in 1 dB steps to it's highest level. After fade is over, the receive end commands transmit power to decrease in 1 dB steps to the lowest level.

The ATPC range (high and low limits) is variable, determined by link distance, link location, and link frequency. When ATPC Enabled is checked, the range values are shown in parenthesis (minimum -maximum) following ATPC Range.

When ATPC is not enabled the transmit output will always operate at it's highest level.

Remote Transmit Power Control (RTPC) allowed transmitted power range.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 53Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 53

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 53

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL Transceiver Radio Channel

5.7 Equipment View - Settings Tab - Alarm Profile

Click alarm Profile1

Select Show details2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 54Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 54

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 54

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 55

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 55

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-109 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 56

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 56

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem

Double-click a MOD300 card

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 56

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 57

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 57

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.2 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Adaptive Modulation Mode

Select Adaptive Modulaiton1

Rx frequency automatically populated when TX frequency is set

Set Reference Channel Spacing, Modulation, and gain

2

Select Channel 1 Shifter Frequency3

Set Tx frequency4

Click Apply5

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 57

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 58

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 58

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.3 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode

Select Presetting (default)1

Rx frequency automatically populated when TX frequency is set

Set Reference Channel Spacing, Modulation, and gain

2

Select Channel 1 Shifter Frequency3

Set Tx frequency4

Click Apply5

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 58

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 59

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 59

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.4 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode with ATPC

Enable ATPC1

Enter min and max Tx power2

Enter ATPC Rx Threshold3

Click Apply4

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 59

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 60

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 60

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.5 Radio Modem Measurements Tab

Click Start to show power measurement graph

2

Set parameters for power measurements1

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-123 for more details

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 60

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 61

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 61

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 MOD300 Radio Channel

6.6 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 61

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 62Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 62

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 62

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 63

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 63

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-109 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 64

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 64

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.1 Equipment View - Radio Modem

Double-click the MPT-HL2

Select an MPT-HC1

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 64

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 65

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 65

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.2 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Adaptive Modulation Mode

Select Adaptive Modulation1

Rx frequency automatically populated when TX frequency is set

Set Reference Channel Spacing, Modulation, and gain

2

Select Channel 1 Shifter Frequency3

Set Tx frequency4

Click Apply5

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 65

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 66

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 66

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.3 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode

Enable ATPC1

Enter min and max Tx power2

Enter ATPC Rx Threshold3

Click Apply4

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 66

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 67

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 67

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.4 Radio Modem Settings Tab - Presetting Mode with ATPC

Enable ATPC1

Enter min and max Tx power2

Enter ATPC Rx Threshold3

Click Apply4

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 67

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 68

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 68

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.5 Radio Modem Measurements Tab

Click Start to show power measurement graph

2

Set parameters for power measurements1

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-123 for more details

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 68

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 69

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 69

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 MPT-HC Radio Channel

7.6 Radio Modem Power Measurements Graphic

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 69

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 70Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 70

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 70

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 71

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 71

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-118 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 72Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 72

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 72

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.1 Configuration Menu

Grayed out fields are not implemented in this version of the 9500 MPR.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 73Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 73

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 73

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.2 Configuration Menu - NE Time Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-119 for more details

The NE local time can be displayed and re-aligned to the OS time basis.

From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option.

The NE Time dialogue box displays the current NE time and the current OS time.

To re-align the NE time to the OS time, click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box and click the Apply pushbutton to validate. This only works if the Network Time Protocol (NTP) is disabled.

Click the Refresh button to the refresh of the screen.

NTP will display Enabled or Disabled and address information as set under Configuration >Network Configuration > NTP Configuration.

The Time settings will be grayed if the NTP is Enabled.

The Operating System Time is from your PC or laptop.

Network Element time is from the CSM-E/Core-E.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 74Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 74

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 74

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.3 Network Configuration - Local Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-118 for more details

Select Configuration>Network Configuration>Local Configuration

1

To get access the Network Configuration option select the Configuration pull down menu.

Local Configuration: defines the local virtual NE address

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 75Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 75

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 75

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Local Configuration allows you to configure the local IP address of the NE

The local IP address is the IP address associated to a virtual interface and to the other interfaces which use the PPP protocol (the TMN-RF channels)

Default IP address: 10.0.1.2 (new card)Default mask: 255.255.255.255

8 Configuration Menu

8.3 Network Configuration - Local Configuration [cont.]

The dialogue box opens to configure the local IP address of the NE.

This local IP address is the IP address associated to a virtual interface and to the other interfaces which use the PPP protocol (the TMN-RF channels).

Default IP address: 10.0.1.2

Default mask: 255.255.255.255

Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue box and closes it; the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

Close button closes the dialogue.

Help button provides some useful information about the dialogue

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 76Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 76

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 76

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.4 Network Configuration - NTP Configuration

Select Configuration>Network Configuration>NTP Configuration

1

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks over packet-switched, variable-latency data networks.

NTP Configuration: defines the Network Time Protocol

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 77Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 77

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 77

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.5 Network Configuration - IP Static Routing Configuration

Select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration>IP Static Routing Configuration

1

Grayed out fields are not implemented in this version of the 9500 MPR.

The Network Configuration is used to perform the following operations:

Local Configuration: defines the local virtual NE address

NTP Configuration

Ethernet Configuration

IP Configuration:

IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static routing

OSPF Area configuration: defines the Open Shortest Path First address

IP Point-To-Point Configuration: defines the IP address of the interfaces which use the PPP protocol

Routing information: shows a summary of the information relevant to the routing which has been configured.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 78Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 78

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 78

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.5 Network Configuration - IP Static Routing Configuration [cont.]

Select Host and enter IP Address, orNetwork and enter IP Mask2

Select Gateway IP Address andenter Gateway IP Address, orPoint to Point Interface Indexand enter Interface Type

3

Click Create4

Click Close5

Static Routing

Usually used at radio WAN border routers to specify a default gateway to:

use for reaching external networks when the external network does not use a supported dynamic routing protocol.

control the exchange of dynamic route information between the radio WAN and the external network.

Static routing only supports provisioning a single route to a given destination at any radio. Route metrics and redundant routes are not supported. This limits the useful WAN topologies to linear and tree configurations when using Static Routing.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 79Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 79

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 79

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.6 Network Configuration - OSPF Area Configuration

Select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration>OSFP Area Configuration

1

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)

The preferred method for routing within the radio WANs.

Uses a simplified OSPF implementation.

Configuration requires only an Area ID and Mask.

Supports redundant WAN paths, allowing linear, tree, ring, mesh and other WAN topologies. If redundant paths are available, OSPF can reconfigure routes to work around a failed link.

Dynamically assigns a routing metric to redundant paths based on route cost, where the route cost is determined by the speed of the interface used and the hop count to a destination.

Supports a maximum of 250 routes within a single OSPF area.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 80Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 80

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 80

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.6 Network Configuration - OSPF Area Configuration [cont.]

Click Create5 Click Close7Click Apply6

Select (check) new2

Enter OSFP Area Address3

Select OSFP Area Stub Flag4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 81Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 81

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 81

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.7 Network Configuration - Routing Information

Select Configuration>Network Configuration>Routing Information

1

This screen is a read-only screen and displays the routing parameters currently on the NE

The pushbutton Refresh allows to refresh the information shown in the screen.

The Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 82Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 82

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 82

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.8 Alarm Severities

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 83Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 83

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 83

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.8 Alarm Severities [cont.]

Note: Screen is read only

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 84Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 84

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 84

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-117 for more details

8 Configuration Menu

8.9 Configuration Menu - System Settings

Select Configuration>System Settings1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 85Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 85

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 85

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

This window defines the system configuration, providing the settings of some parameters for the NE setup.

8 Configuration Menu

8.9 Configuration Menu - System Settings [cont.]

Select DHCP Server and click Apply2

Select Ethernet LOS Criteria and click Apply3

Select Static Lag Criteria and click Apply4

Enter System Priority Parameter (0-65535) and click Apply5

Select Event and Alarm Log and click Apply6

Enter NEC MAC Bridge Address7

Click Close8

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 86Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 86

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 86

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.10 DiffServ - Class of Service

Priority Flow

8 (Highest Priority) TDM2TDM

7 TDM2ETH and TMN

6 ETH2ETH

5 EthernetNetwork Control and Voice

VoIP, Video conferencing, Audio conferencing

4 EthernetVideo

3 Controlled Load EthernetBroadcast (Audio/Video)

2 Best Effort EthernetWeb Browsing, Chat, Games

1 (Lowest Priority) Background EthernetE-mail, database download

The Quality of Service feature of the Ethernet switch provides eight internal queues for each port to support eight different class of service (COS).

For each egress port according to the method of QoS classification configured in the switch, the packets are assigned to specific queue.

The higher priority queue is reserved for TDM2TDM flows; the queue 7 is reserved for TDM2ETH flows while the queue 6 for TMN flows.

The remaining five queues are shared by all generic Ethernet flows according the default and fixed classification mechanism configured by CT/NMS.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 87Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 87

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 87

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.11 Configuration Menu - Cross-Connections

Select Configuration>Cross Connections1

Use the menu or the icon to setup cross-connections.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 88Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 88

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 88

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.11 Configuration Menu - Cross-Connections [cont.]

Port Colors: White Green Blue

Can accept X-Connect — No Active XC XCan accept X-Connect — At least 1 Active XC XCannot accept X--Connect (All cross-connects are configured, or not configured)

X

Ethernet Ports

The Main view is a graphical representation of cross-connectable slots. Slots (represented by “connectors”) are arranged according to the equipment configuration:

There are a maximum of 4 Ethernet ports placed on the bottom, ordered from 1 to 4 (from left to right).

There are a maximum of 8 (PDH/Radio) slots (placed as in the CSM-E/Core-E sub-rack)

Note: We will get into more detail later in this course.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 89Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 89

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 89

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-141 and 142 for more details

Select Configuration>Ring Configuration1

Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) switching is a protection mechanism for Ethernet ring topologies.

An ERP topology is a collection of Ethernet Ring Nodes forming a closed physical loop. A minimum of two and maximum of sixteen Ethernet Ring Nodes are supported per ERP topology. One ERP topology is supported per NE.

The fundamentals of ring protection switching architectures are loop avoidance and the utilization of learning, forwarding, and address table management.

Up to two ERP instances are supported per ERP topology.

Ethernet Ring Links connect two adjacent Ethernet Ring Nodes participating in the same ERP Topology.

The Ethernet port used to construct the Ethernet Ring Link is called a Ring Port.

Use the menu or the icon to setup Ethernet ring parameters.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 90Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 90

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 90

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration - Normal [cont.]

Under normal operating conditions the RPL is blocked, and traffic flows on all links in the ring except the RPL.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 91Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 91

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 91

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration - Failure [cont.]

Under a ring link failure condition, the RPL owner is responsible to unblock the RPL. The Ring Node (or nodes) which perform local detection of the signal fail condition, put their Ring Ports in a blocking state the set of VLANs assigned to the ERP Instance on the radio interface where the failure has been detected.

Under a ring link failure condition, the RPL owner is responsible to unblock the RPL. The Ring Node (or nodes) which perform local detection of the signal fail condition, put their Ring Ports in a blocking state the set of VLANs assigned to the ERP Instance on the radio interface where the failure has been detected.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 92Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 92

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 92

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.12 Configuration Menu - Ring Configuration [cont.]

Enter ERP topology parameters1

Click Create2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 93Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 93

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 93

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.13 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Ring Instance

Enter ERP instance parameters4

Click Create3

Click Create5

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 94Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 94

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 94

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.13 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Ring Instance [cont.]

Select ERP Instance6

Enter Restore Time and Guard Timer data7

Click Apply8

Select ERP Enabled9

Click Apply10

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 95Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 95

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 95

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.14 Configuration Menu - LAG Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-140 for more details

Select Configuration>Lag configuration1

Ethernet and Radio LAG ports are provisioned using the Craft Terminal.

Ethernet and Radio ports must be configured prior to provisioning LAG ports.

Use the menu or the icon to setup Lag configuration.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 96Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 96

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 96

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.14 Configuration Menu - LAG Configuration [cont.]

Click Create1

Click Create3

Enter LAG data2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 97Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 97

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 97

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.14 Configuration Menu - LAG Configuration [cont.]

Select LAG4

If port type is L2 Radio, select port type, port, and click >

5a If LAG type is L2 Ethernet, select priority

5b

Select L2 or L36

If LAG type is radio, enable or disable PPP RF7

Click Apply8

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 98Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 98

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 98

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-147 for more details

Select Configuration>QoS configuration1

Use the menu or the icon to setup QoS configuration.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 99Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 99

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 99

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.1 Queue Scheduling

Select Scheduler Classification tab1

Select algorithm mode2

For DWRR mode, select queue weight3

Click Apply4

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window5

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 100Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 100

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 100

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.2 Queue Size

Select Queue Size Configuration tab1

Double-click cell and enter data2

Modified queue size values shown in yellow

Click Apply3

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 101Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 101

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 101

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.3 Classification

Select QoS Classification tab1

Select classification criteria2

Click Apply3

Select QoS Classification tab1

Select classification criteria2

Click Apply3

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 102Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 102

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 102

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.4 802.1p

Select QoS Classification tab1

Select PCP to Forwarding Class values2

Click Apply3

Modified forwarding class values shown in yellow

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 103Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 103

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 103

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8.15 Configuration Menu - QoS Configuration

8.15.5 DiffServ

Select QoS Classification tab1

Select DiffServ to Forwarding Class values

2

Click Apply3

Modified forwarding class values shown in yellow

Click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 104Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 104

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 104

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration

The XPIC function is two links operating on the same radio channel, one using horizontal polarization, and the other using vertical

Select Configuration>XPIC Configuration1

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-109 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 105Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 105

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 105

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration [cont.]

Select Horizontal port and draw line to Vertical port2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 106Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 106

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 106

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration [cont.]

Click OK3

Click Apply4

Click Close5

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 107Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 107

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 107

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.16 Configuration Menu - XPIC Configuration [cont.]

Verify the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface6

MPT Main View Setting tab display

Select the Vertical channel and verify the correct channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel.

Select the Horizontal channel and verify the correct channel is shown for Associated Interface Vertical radio channel.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 108Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 108

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 108

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.17 Configuration Menu - VLAN Configuration

VLAN configuration determines Ethernet traffic management, 802.1D (default), or 802.1Q

Select Configuration>VLAN Configuration1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 109Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 109

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 109

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.18 Configuration Menu - Profiles Management

Select Configuration>Profiles Management1

Change user’s own password Password change by admin

The operator can perform the following actions:

Create a new user by clicking on the Create button

On the Profiles Management screen, click on Create button. Create User screen is displayed.

On the Create User screen, enter Admin Password.

On the Create User screen, enter User Name. User Name can be up to 20 characters and is case sensitive.

On the Create User screen, select Profile from list of four profiles to match user’s job description.

On the Create User screen, enter Users Password. Password can be up to 20 characters and is case sensitive.

Enter users password again to confirm password.

On the Create User screen, click Apply button. JUSM performs a syntax check of each field. If no error messages are displayed, Create User screen closes and new users name and profile is displayed on Profiles Management screen.

After the selection of a user in the table, it's possible to:

Delete an existing user (the Admin user cannot be deleted) by clicking on the Delete button.

Change PW (by Administrator) by clicking on the Change PW button.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 110Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 110

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 110

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.19 Configuration Menu - Ethernet Features Shell

The LAG can be created by CLI commands launched with the WebEML from the menu Configuration > Ethernet Features Shell

Select Configuration>Ethernet Features Shell1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 111Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 111

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 111

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Configuration Menu

8.20 Current Configuration View

When configuration is complete print the Current Configuration View for your records.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 112Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 112

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 112

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 113

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 113

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 Supervision Menu

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AG DLP-136 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 114Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 114

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 114

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 Supervision Menu

9.1 Supervision Menu

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 115Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 115

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 115

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 Supervision Menu

9.2 Supervision Menu - Access State

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-136 for more details

Click to switch NE management via the network

Click to switch NE management via the Craft Terminal

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the choice of the OS or the CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.If the LAC is “access denied”, it means that the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify the NE configuration (it can only «read»). In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.If the LAC is “granted”, it means that the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape. If the LAC is “requested”, it means that the CT has requested a permission from the OS and is waiting for a replay.

However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services include:Alarm reception and processingPerformance processingSwitching back to the OS access state

Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu.

If the OS does not answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be managed by a Craft Terminal.The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. When the communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the communication and forces the state existing before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 116Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 116

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 116

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Restart NE operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.

9 Supervision Menu

9.3 Supervision Menu - Restart NE

Select Supervision>Restart NE1

WARNING: After the activation of the Restart NE Command (or after the pressing of the HW reset push-button) the supervision of the local NE and the remote NEs is lost.

This operation deletes all Current Data and all History Data. All PM data will be lost.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 117Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 117

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 117

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Restart MPT operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions

9 Supervision Menu

9.4 Supervision Menu - Restart MPT

Select MPT to restart2

Select Supervision>Restart MPT1

Click Restart3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 118Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 118

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 118

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 Supervision Menu

9.5 Supervision Menu - MIB Management

The MIB Management operation is used to backup and restore system files, remove files, and activate the system

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-131 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 119Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 119

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 119

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 Supervision Menu

9.6 MIB Management - Backup

Select Supervision>MIB Management>Backup

1

Enter backup file name2

Click Save3

The following parameters are not saved during MIB Management Database Backup, and are not affected during the restore operation:

Loopbacks

Manual protection switches

TMN In-band Ethernet Port Configuration

It is recommended that these parameters be saved by running a Current Configuration View report, so they may be reprovisioned in the event that the system needs to be restored from scratch.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 120Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 120

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 120

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 Supervision Menu

9.7 MIB Management - Restore/Activate

Restores/activates saved NE configuration parameters to the CSM-E/Core-E

MIB database restore should be performed for catastrophic recovery ONLY

Select Supervision>MIB Management>Restore/Activate

1

Select file from list2

Click Open3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 121Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 121

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 121

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Remove a file from the database

9 Supervision Menu

9.8 MIB Management - Remove file

Select Supervision>MIB Management>Remove Filr

1

Click Open3

Select file from list2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 122Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 122

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 122

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-120 for more details

9 Supervision Menu

9.9 Supervision Menu - SW License

Click to see Software License information

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 123Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 123

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 123

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 Supervision Menu

9.10 Supervision Menu - SW License Window

SW License String: the Serial Number of the flash card

SW License Code: the type of the license written in the flash card

SW License Key: the license

Flash Card

The flash card consists of:

License Key

MAC Address

SW Load

The Refresh button activates a new reading of the read-only fields.

SW License Key

A license key is a functional management tool that allows the customer to chose between predefined sets of features for the 9500 MPR and select only the license keys that have desired features.

Additional license keys can be added, adding features, as requirements change, using the license upgrade procedure. After additional license keys are added, select Apply.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 124Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 124

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 124

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 125

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 125

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

10 Software Download Menu

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 126Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 126

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 126

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

10 Software Download Menu

10.1 SW Download Menu

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 127Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 127

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 127

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

10 Software Download Menu

10.2 SW Download Menu - Server Access Configuration

FTP Login fields:

User Id and Password fields are the login information to access the FTP server

Address field is the IP address of the FTP server

Port field is the port to be used

Root Dir field is the FTP server directory name from which the software can be downloaded

FTP Login buttons:

Set Default – automatically fills server access values with the default configuration

The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters:

User Id: anonymous

Password: -

Address: local host IP address

Port: 21

Root Dir: /

System defaults can be changed by entering different values in the fields

OK – saves current values as system defaults

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 128Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 128

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 128

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

10 Software Download Menu

10.3 SW Download Menu - Init SW Download

Download software to the NE to upgrade the NE software version

FTP Server Address is from the last overhead regarding Server Access Configuration

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 129Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 129

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 129

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Display and activate software version loaded on the NE

10 Software Download Menu

10.4 SW Download Menu - SW Status

Banks 1 and 2

The following information is displayed:

Name - software name

Version - software version

Operational Status:

Enabled - software downloaded with no errors

Disabled - errors

Current status:

Committed - software currently in use

Stand by - software in standby

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 130Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 130

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 130

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

10 Software Download Menu

10.5 SW Download Menu - SW Status Detail

Note: Software Management Action area is active for stand by bank only

Click to View Software Unit details1

Select Software Management Action2

Click Apply Action3

Selecting Forced Activation forces the bank to be activated to restart

Selecting Activation restarts the bank to be activated only if the content of the two banks differ

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 131Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 131

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 131

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 2Operator GUI - NEtO Overview

Lab Exercise 3Operator GUI - NE Main View

Lab Exercise 4Operator GUI - NEtO Menus

Lab Exercise 5MPT-HL and MOD300 Configuration

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 132Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 132

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 132

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 133Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 133

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 133

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

NEtO applicationConnect to a 9500 MPR-A either via a network connection

or directly to the NMS (Craft) terminal9500 MPR-A Network Elements

Tool BarsAlarm & State PanelsEquipment TabProtection TabSynchronization TabConnections TabMPT-HL SettingsRadio Modem SettingsLocal ConfigurationNTP Configuration

IP ConfigurationIP Static Routing ConfigurationOSPF Area ConfigurationSystem SettingsCross-ConnectionsSW LicenseServer Access ConfigurationInit SW DownloadSW Status

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-6 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 134Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 134

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Operator GUI Interface4 · 1 · 134

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleOperator GUI Interface

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 2Cross Connections

TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4NE Operation

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Revised to release 3.03Moehlenkamp, John2012-02-073.03

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2007-07-30 External Consultant First edition

01.10 2008-09-30 Fisher, Sheldon Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.20 2008-01-21 Fisher, Sheldon Revisions after Pilot Class

01.31 2009-03-05 Fisher, Sheldon Final Revisions

01.41 2009-06-15 Robinson, Ken Revised for release 2.0

01.42 2009-08-12 Robinson, Ken Revised after review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Configure DS1 portsConfigure DS3 portsDescribe cross-connectionsTDM2TDM ModeTDM2Eth ModeTDM2TDMoEth ModeConfigure DS1 cross-connectionsConfigure DS3 cross-connectionsConfigure Ethernet portsDescribe port segregation Configure Ethernet (P2P VLAN) cross-connectionsConfigure radio cross-connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 DS1 Ports 71.1 NE Main View - Connections Tab without Connections 81.2 NE Main View - Equipment Tab 91.3 NE - DS1 Ports Settings Tab 10

2 Cross-Connections 152.1 Cross-Connections 162.2 TDM2TDM Mode 182.3 TDM2Eth Mode 192.4 TDM2TDMoEth Mode 202.5 Cross-Connections 22

3 DS1 Cross-Connections 253.1 DS1 Cross-Connections 263.2 PDH (DS1) to MPT-HL Cross-Connections 30

4 DS3 Ports 334.1 NE Main View - Connections Tab without Connections 344.2 NE Main View - Equipment Tab 354.3 NE - DS3 Ports Settings Tab 36

5 DS3 Cross-Connections 415.1 DS3 Cross-Connections 425.2 PDH (DS3) to MPT-HL Cross-Connections 46

6 Ethernet Ports 496.1 NE Main View - Equipment Tab – Ethernet Ports 506.2 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Ports 516.3 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Ports 526.4 CSM-E/Core-E TMN Interface 536.5 Inband TMN VLAN 546.6 Static Routing 55

7 Port Segregation 577.1 CSM-E/Core-E and EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Switches 587.2 Port Segregation 597.3 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Port Segregation 607.4 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Port Segregation 617.5 Configuration 63

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections 658.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections 668.2 NE Main View - Connections Tab with Ethernet Cross-Connection 69

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections 719.1 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections 72

10 Radio Cross-Connections 7510.1 Radio to Radio Cross-Connections 76

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view! Page

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 DS1 Ports

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-104 and DLP-106 for more

details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 8Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 DS1 Ports

1.1 NE Main View - Connections Tab without Connections

Connections Panel will be empty until cross-connects are configured

Cross-connections are always required for TDM traffic.

Generic Ethernet traffic is handled automatically via MAC Address learning in the Ethernet switch.

Cross-connections can also be used with point-to-point VLAN Ethernet traffic to direct traffic based on VLAN tag rather than MAC address.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 9Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 DS1 Ports

1.2 NE Main View - Equipment Tab

Double-click a DS1 card to set ports

All configuration instructions in training material are for training only. Always refer to latest customer documentation for steps to configure a working system.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 10Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 DS1 Ports

1.3 NE - DS1 Ports Settings Tab

32DS1 ports

Table of DS1 port settings

Settings Tab - settings for selected DS1 port

Double-click the MSS/DS1 (P32E1DS1) module in the Resource List Area.

The Alarms and Settings screens will display.

Select Settings tab.

Select a DS1 port number, 01 to 32.

Select the Signal Mode drop-down menu and choose signal mode type, Disabled, Unframed or Framed.

Select the Service Profile drop-down menu and choose service profile type, TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.

DS1 Port Service Profile provisioning must be the same at both ends of the link.

Select the appropriate Line Coding radio button, AMI or B8ZS.

Enter the Line Length (distance to cross-connect), 0 to 655.

Click Apply to save the DS1 port provisioning.

You may need to changed more values and click Apply again.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 11Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 DS1 Ports

1.3 NE - DS1 Ports Settings Tab [cont.]

Select port to enable

1Select framing2

Distance (feet) to cross-connect3

Flow ID number required to transport DS1 data

4

Click Apply5

Flow ID number is unique for that DS1 port on both ends of the path and once assigned, cannot be repeated throughout the network.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 12Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 DS1 Ports

1.3 NE - DS1 Ports Settings Tab [cont.]

Port is now active

In TDM2TDM mode, TDMs are collected, packetized, transmitted over the radio, switched in the node and then de-packetized at the last node.

In TDM2Eth mode, TDMs are collected, packetized and made available over Ethernet at the last node.

TDM2Eth Terms

Signal Mode - Configures framing detector on P2E2DS3 module.

Both the near end and far end facility Signal Mode must be set the same.

Payload Size - Number of data bits without overhead in Mb/s. Both the near end and far end facility must be set the same.

ECID (Emulation Identification) is a network unique 8-bit code identifier used along with V-LAN to identify and switch individual DS1 lines through the CSM-E/Core-E.

Verify near end ECID Tx and far end ECID Rx are set the same.

Verify far end ECID Tx and near end ECID Rx are set the same.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 13Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 6Configure DS1 Ports

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 14Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Cross-Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 16Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Cross-Connections

2.1 Cross-Connections

Cross connection is only required for TDM traffic. Generic Ethernet traffic is handled automatically via MAC Address learning in the Ethernet switch. Cross connections can also be used with point-to-point VLAN Ethernet traffic to direct traffic based on a VLAN tag rather than MAC address

The cross connections screen is used to configure switching of packetized data. Using this screen, the operator can switch:

PDH to Radio:PDH (DS1 port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)PDH (DS3 port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)

PDH to Ethernet:PDH (DS1 port) to ETH (CSM-E/Core-E or EAS/P8ETH Ethernet port)PDH (DS3 port) to ETH (CSM-E/Core-E or EAS/P8ETH Ethernet port)

Ethernet to Radio:ETH (CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)ETH (EAS/P8ETH Ethernet port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)

Radio to Radio:RADIO (MOD300 radio port) to RADIO (MOD300 radio port)RADIO (EAS/P8ETH radio port) to RADIO (MOD300 or EAS/P8ETH radio port)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 17Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 17

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Cross-Connections

2.1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

The cross-connections between slots and between slot and Ethernet user ports are realized with a Layer-2 Ethernet Switch inside the Core-E unit.

The decision made by the switch to forward the received packet is based on the destination MAC address.

Each DS1can be cross connected independently.

DS1 can be cross connected to any of the following interfaces:

Radio interface

Ethernet interface

Each DS1(board #, port #) must be associated to an unique signal flow ID.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 18Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Cross-Connections

2.2 TDM2TDM Mode

In TDM2TDM mode, the 9500 MPR-A operates like a TDM radioDS1s and DS3s are collected, packetized, transmitted over the radio,

switched in the node and then de-packetized and dropped as DS1/DS3 traffic

9500MPR9500MPR

9500MPR

9500MPR

DS1/DS3

DS1/DS3

DS1/DS3 DS1/DS3

TDM2TDM

The DS1 data stream is inserted into one Node and extracted in another Node.

The two Internal Working Functions (IWF) used to packetize the traffic for the Ethernet switch in the CSM-E/Core-E are internal in the radio.

Service profile provisioning is TDM2TDM for both Nodes.

Cross-connections are DS1 module (PDH) to radio module.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 19Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

DS1/DS3

DS1/DS3

2 Cross-Connections

2.3 TDM2Eth Mode

Ethernet Ethernet

LAN/MANLAN/MANLAN/MANLAN/MAN

9500MPR9500MPR 9500MPR

In TDM2Eth mode, the 9500 MPR-A operates like a straight-through Ethernet connectionDS1s and DS3s are collected, packetized, transmitted over the radio, switched in the node and then dropped as Ethernet traffic

DS1/DS3

9500MPR

TDM2Eth

Ethernet Signal Flow - The Ethernet is inserted into customer access ports on the CSM-E/Core-E EAS/P8ETH in one Node and extracted from customer access ports on the CSM-E/Core-E EAS/P8ETH in another Node.

Service profile provisioning is TDM2Eth for both Nodes.

Cross-connections are automatically made by the Ethernet switch.

DS1 Signal Flow - The DS1 port data stream is inserted into one Node and extracted in another Node.

Service profile provisioning is TDM2Eth for both Nodes.

Cross-connections are DS1 module port (PDH) to radio module.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 20Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Cross-Connections

2.4 TDM2TDMoEth Mode

CSM-E/Core-ECSM-E/Core-E

TDM(32xDS1)

TDMTDM(32xDS1(32xDS1)

MPT-HLMay not be needed

MPT-HLMay not be needed

EAS/P8ETHEAS/P8ETHEAS/P8ETH n x Ethernet

Ethernet/IP/MPLS Network

Ethernet/IP/MEthernet/IP/MPLS NetworkPLS Network

Eth

9500 MPR

9500 MPR

Eth

LAN/MANLAN/MANLAN/MANLAN/MAN

Ethernet/IP/MPLS Network

Ethernet/IP/MPLEthernet/IP/MPLS NetworkS Network

DS1 DS1

TDMoEth

TDMoEth is a system that is used to transport TDM and Ethernet traffic through Ethernet.

TDMoEth provides:

Transparency of signaling protocols (CAS, PRI, SS7, …)

Investment Protection – migration to IP without compromising rich PBX features (evolutionary approach with no fork-lift upgrades)

Channel aggregation and multiplexing that improves resiliency to packet loss

Maintains clock synchronization and Low Latency

There is not a way to directly provision the TDM2TDMoEth mode. TDM2TDMoEth is a way of using the 9500 MPR. Just provision the TDM2TDM to a Ethernet port.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 21Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 21

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Cross-Connections

2.4 TDM2TDMoEth Mode [cont.]

DS1

Ethernet

DS3

Dashed lines indicate protection group

Click on Cross-Connect icon

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 22Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Cross-Connections

2.5 Cross-Connections

Slot ColorsWhiteWhite Enabled for cross-connection - not

currently cross-connected

GreenGreen Enabled for cross-connection -currently cross-connected

BlueBlue Disabled for cross-connection (ETH, RADIO, and PDH) or fully cross-connected (RADIO and PDH)

GrayGray Spare port of a protection pair

Slot TypesRadio

PDH

Ethernet

Radio LAG

Eth LAG

Eth Ring

Cross connection port icons

PDH: Identifies PDH/SDH Ports

ETH: Identifies ETH Ports

RADIO: Identifies Radio Ports

ETH LAG: Identifies Ethernet LAG Ports

RADIO LAG: Identifies Radio LAG Ports

Ring: Identifies Ethernet Ring Port

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 23Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Cross-Connections

2.5 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Connection line colors

PDH-Radio BlackBlackPDH-Eth BlueBlueRadio-Radio RedRedRadio-Eth GreenGreen

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 24Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 24Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 25

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-112 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 26Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections

Flow ID pop-up dialog box appears2

Draw cross-connection1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 27Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 27

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 27

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Select Flow IDs3

Click OK4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 28Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 28

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 28

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Click Apply to complete the cross-connect

5

Colors of connectors change as appropriate

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 29Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 29

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 29

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.1 DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Right-click Slot 5/6 DS16

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 30Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 30

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 30

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 DS1 Cross-Connections

3.2 PDH (DS1) to MPT-HL Cross-Connections

Connections tab now shows connection

For TDM2Eth connections in a protected state, the MSB of the MAC address must be 1.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 31Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 31

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 31

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 7DS1 Cross-Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 32Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 32

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 32

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 33

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 33

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 DS3 Ports

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-104 and DLP-106 for more

details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 34Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 34

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 34

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 DS3 Ports

4.1 NE Main View - Connections Tab without Connections

Connections Panel will be empty until cross-connects are configured

Cross-connections are always required for TDM traffic.

Generic Ethernet traffic is handled automatically via MAC Address learning in the Ethernet switch.

Cross-connections can also be used with point-to-point VLAN Ethernet traffic to direct traffic based on VLAN tag rather than MAC address.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 35Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 35

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 35

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 DS3 Ports

4.2 NE Main View - Equipment Tab

Double-click a DS3 card to set ports

All configuration instructions in training material are for training only. Always refer to latest customer documentation for steps to configure a working system.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 36Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 36

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 36

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 DS3 Ports

4.3 NE - DS3 Ports Settings Tab

2DS1 ports

Table of DS3 port settings

Settings Tab - settings for selected DS3 port

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 37Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 37

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 37

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 DS3 Ports

4.3 NE - DS3 Ports Settings Tab [cont.]

Select port to enable

1

Click Apply6

Distance (feet) to cross-connect and AIS signal

3

Select Signal Mode2

Select device profile4

Flow ID number required to transport DS3 data

5

Flow ID number is unique for that DS3 port on both ends of the path and once assigned, cannot be repeated throughout the network.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 38Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 38

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 38

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 DS3 Ports

4.3 NE - DS3 Ports Settings Tab [cont.]

Port is now active

In TDM2TDM mode, TDMs are collected, packetized, transmitted over the radio, switched in the node and then de-packetized at the last node.

In TDM2Eth mode, TDMs are collected, packetized and made available over Ethernet at the last node.

TDM2Eth Terms

Signal Mode - Configures framing detector on P2E2DS3 module.

Both the near end and far end facility Signal Mode must be set the same.

Payload Size - Number of data bits without overhead in Mb/s. Both the near end and far end facility must be set the same.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 39Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 39

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 39

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 8Configure DS3 Ports

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 40Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 40

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 40

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 41

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 41

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operations and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-112 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 42Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 42

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 42

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections

Flow ID pop-up dialog box appears2

Draw cross-connectionn1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 43Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 43

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 43

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Select Flow IDs3

Click OK4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 44Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 44

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 44

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Click Apply to complete the cross-connect

5

Colors of connectors change as appropriate

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 45Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 45

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 45

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.1 DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Right-click Slot 5/6 DS16

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 46Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 46

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 46

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 DS3 Cross-Connections

5.2 PDH (DS3) to MPT-HL Cross-Connections

Connections tab now shows connection

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 47Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 47

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 47

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 9DS3 Cross-Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 48Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 48

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 48

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 49

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 49

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Ethernet Ports

Refer to 9500 MPR Operations and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-104 and DLP-108 for more

details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 50Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 50

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 50

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Ethernet Ports

6.1 NE Main View - Equipment Tab – Ethernet Ports

Double-click the CSM or EAS card to set Ethernet ports

The cross-connection between Slots, Ethernet user ports, and Equipment Controller are realized with a standard Ethernet Switch.

The destination MAC address or the VLAN or both are used by the switch to decide towards which egress port to send each received packet.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 51Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 51

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 51

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Ethernet Ports

6.2 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Ports

Select port to enable

2

Click Apply6

Select Settings tab3

Select Ethernet Physical Interface tab1

Select Enabled and click Apply4

Set parameters5

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 52Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 52

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 52

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Ethernet Ports

6.3 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Ports

Select port to enable

2

Click Apply6

Select Settings tab3

Select Ethernet Physical Interface tab1

Select Enabled and click Apply4

Set parameters5

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 53Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 53

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 53

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Ethernet Ports

6.4 CSM-E/Core-E TMN Interface

Select port to enable

1

Select Settings tab2

Set parameters3

Click Apply4

Provision TMN Interface

The Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) is a protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems, such as 9500 MPR, in a communications network.

1. Select TMN Interface tab.

2. Select TMN Port in left frame.

3. Select Settings tab.

4. Select TMN Ethernet Enabled check box.

5. Enter the IP Address and IP Mask.

6. Select the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu and choose Static Routing.

or

Select the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu and choose OSPF.

7. Click Apply to store TMN Interface provisioning.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 54Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 54

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 54

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Ethernet Ports

6.5 Inband TMN VLAN

Inband TMN VLAN port allows the user to manage an 9500 MPR-A NE using a general Ethernet port from a central location (NOC).

Inband TMN messages reach the 9500 MPR-A over general user electrical Ethernet port 3 and optical Ethernet port 5 on the CSM-E/Core-E card.

Either electrical Ethernet port 3 or optical Ethernet port 5 can be used simultaneously for both general Ethernet traffic and TMN traffic.

Inband TMN provisioning applies to both electrical Ethernet port 3 andoptical Ethernet port 5.

TMN Inband TMN VLAN port interface and Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface should not be connected to a network at the same time.

The Inband TMN Ethernet interface:requires its own IP address and sub-network maskuses the same MAC address as Port#4 TMN Ethernet interfacedoes not require Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface to be provisionedrequires a unique VLAN ID (2-4080)

An optional OSPF area can be assigned, and must be provisioned prior to provisioning the Inband TMN Ethernet interface. Supports IP static routing.

This is another method of monitoring alarms.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 55Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 55

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 55

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Ethernet Ports

6.6 Static Routing

Usually used at radio WAN border routers to specify a default gateway to:use for reaching external networks when the external network does not use a supported dynamic routing protocol.control the exchange of dynamic route information between the radio WAN and the external network.

Static routing only supports provisioning a single route to a given destination at any radio. Route metrics and redundant routes are not supported. This limits the useful WAN topologies to linear and tree configurations when using Static Routing.

Maximum of 25 static route entries per radio.To minimize the number of static route entries required, the radio network addressing plan should allow for maximum route aggregation.Static routes directed out the PPP interfaces use the interface name as the route destination; rf, rptr, or (front) ppp.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 56Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 56

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 56

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 10Configure Ethernet Port

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 57

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 57

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Port Segregation

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-111 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 58Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 58

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 58

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Port Segregation

7.1 CSM-E/Core-E and EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Switches

We may think of Ethernet switches as smart multi-port bridgesAfter the destination is found, frames are only forwarded to the correct out port

BAtlanta

DS1DS1

Ethernet Switch

B

Dallas to Atlanta Traffic

Dallas to Dallas to Atlanta Atlanta TrafficTraffic

Ethernet/IP/MPLS

Network

Ethernet/IPEthernet/IP/MPLS /MPLS

NetworkNetwork

Ethernet/IP/MPLS

Network

Ethernet/IPEthernet/IP/MPLS /MPLS

NetworkNetwork

Cross-connections are nailed-up connections. Cross-connections are not required for the Ethernet switch to pass traffic. Even if your Cross-connection screen does not show any connections you may still have traffic across your Ethernet switch.

Layer 2 Switching

An address table is built based on incoming MAC address.

If the address is not known the frames are sent to all ports.

If the address is in the table, frames are only sent to the correct port.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 59Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 59

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 59

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Port Segregation

7.2 Port Segregation

Click Segregated Ports icon

1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 60Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 60

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 60

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Port Segregation

7.3 CSM-E/Core-E Ethernet Port Segregation

Double-click Port Slot 1

2

When provisioning multiple radio links on the same path use port segregation to avoid any Ethernet loops.

Double-click on the promiscuous port. Uncheck all ports to be segregated. Select OK then Apply.

This option sets the segregation state to exclude the port from exchanging frames with a given list of ports.

In this way a segregated port can exchange frames only with a non-segregated port.

Port segregation is used to:

save bandwidth (prevent collisions and broadcasts)

save resources on the node and on the ports

improve the security and the privacy of the transmission

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 61Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 61

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 61

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Port Segregation

7.4 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Port Segregation

Double-click Port Slot 3 Port 1

3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 62Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 62

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 62

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Port Segregation

7.4 EAS/P8ETH Ethernet Port Segregation [cont.]

Click on ports that will be segregated

4

Click OK5

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 63Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 63

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 63

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Port Segregation

7.5 Configuration

Orange dashed lines indicate ports that are segregated from each other

Click Apply6

The switch ports in a private VLAN domain have special characteristics. One key characteristic is port segregation within an isolated VLAN.

Isolated or segregated ports are typically used for those endpoints that only require access to a limited number of outgoing interfaces.

An endpoint connected to an isolated port will only possess the ability to communicate with those endpoints connected to promiscuous ports.

Endpoints connected to adjacent isolated ports cannot communicate with one another.

If you attempt to setup a cross-connection between ports that have been segregated, you will get a warning that the port is segregated.

Press Alt-W. Notice the screens are different if any ports are segregated.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 64Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 64

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 64

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 65

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 65

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-112 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 66Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 66

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 66

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

8.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections

Flow ID pop-up dialog box appears

2

Draw cross-connection

1

Remember Flow Id must be the same on both ends of the path and only used once in the network.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 67Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 67

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 67

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

8.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

Insert Flow ID3

Insert MAC Address4

Click OK5

Ethernet Flow IDsFor multiple Flow IDs:

List each Flow ID separately, with a comma separator (56, 57, 60, 70)

List an inclusive range of Flow IDs (56-65, 70, 72)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 68Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 68

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 68

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

8.1 Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

Click Apply to complete the cross-connect

6

Color of connectors changes as appropriate

Ethernet to Radio Cross-Connections

Select Ethernet port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-ETH pop-up displays.

On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, enter Flow ID number in the Flow ID field.

Enter the destination MAC address where the DS1 will be terminated in the MAC Address field.

On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, click OK.

On the Cross-Connection screen, click Apply.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 69Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 69

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 69

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

8 Ethernet Cross-Connections

8.2 NE Main View - Connections Tab with Ethernet Cross-Connection

Connections tab now shows connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 70Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 70

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 70

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 71

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 71

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-140 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 72Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 72

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 72

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

9.1 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

More than one cross-connection can be drawn if sufficient ports are configured

Cross-connections describe path to use.Segregation describes path not to use.

Each cross-connection must be identified with a separate flow IDThe Point to Point (P2P) VLAN cross-connect allows the user to direct

VLAN-tagged traffic between specified Ethernet and radio portsP2P VLAN must have a MAC Address of 000000000000

Nailed up cross-connections use a physical MAC Address of the device attached to the NE.

Point to Point VLANThe Point to Point (P2P) VLAN cross-connect feature allows the user to direct VLAN-tagged traffic between

specified Ethernet and radio ports. Rather than directing all traffic to and from the cross-connected ports, the feature directs Ethernet traffic where the VLAN tag matches the cross-connect Flow ID. (Flow ID matches VLAN ID.)

When making the connection for a P2P VLAN flow, the user should enter a MAC address of all 0's (000000000000). P2P VLAN cross-connects will direct matching VLAN-tagged Ethernet traffic to the cross-connected ports regardless of the destination MAC address in the Ethernet frames.

Ethernet traffic entering the cross-connected port with a VLAN tag matching the flow id will be directed only to the port on the other end of the cross-connect. Traffic will not be flooded. This will also take precedence over any MAC address learning for VLAN-tagged traffic that matches the flow id in the cross-connect.

Ethernet traffic entering the cross-connected port with no VLAN tag or VLAN tags that do not match the flow id specified in the cross-connect will flood to all ports until MAC address learning takes place. The P2P VLAN cross-connect will have no effect on this traffic.

VLAN tagged Ethernet traffic that enters a port will be dropped if the VLAN tag matches the flow id of a cross-connect that is on a different port.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 73Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 73

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 73

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

9.1 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections [cont.]

Draw new P2P VLAN cross-connection

A virtual LAN (VLAN) is a single broadcast domain.

By default all ports on the Ethernet switch are in a single VLAN until they are divided into multiple VLANs.

Frames are not forwarded from one VLAN to another VLAN. To forward to a different VLAN a router is required.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 74Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 74

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 74

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections

9.1 P2P VLAN Cross-Connections [cont.]

MAC Address must be 000000000000

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 75

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 75

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

10 Radio Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-140 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 76Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 76

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 76

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

10 Radio Cross-Connections

10.1 Radio to Radio Cross-Connections

Click Apply4

Click OK3

Enter Flow ID2

Draw line from radio port to radio port1

Radio to Radio Cross-Connections

Select Radio port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-RADIO pop-up displays.

On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, enter Flow ID number in the Flow Id field (flow ID must be the same through the entire path).

On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, click OK.

On the Cross-Connections screen, click Apply.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 77Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 77

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 77

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 11Ethernet Cross-Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 78Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 78

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 78

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 79Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 79

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 79

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

Configure DS1 portsDescribe cross-connectionsConfigure DS1 cross-connections Configure DS3 portsConfigure DS3 cross-connectionsConfigure Ethernet portsDescribe port segregation Configure Ethernet (P2P VLAN) cross-connectionsConfigure radio cross-connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-7 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 80Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 80

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Cross Connections4 · 2 · 80

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleCross Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 3Performance Monitoring

TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4NE Operation

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01.42 2009-08-04 Robinson, Ken First edition

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03 2012-02-07 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.03

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to sse the menus and tabs to observe the 9500 MPR-A Network Element’s performance:

Power MeasurementsAlarmsEvent LogRemote InventoryAbnormal Condition ListSummary Block Diagram ViewCurrent Configuration ViewPerformance Monitoring IconLoopback

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 Power Measurements 71.1 Equipment Tab 81.2 Measurements Tab 91.3 Equipment View - Measurements Tab 101.4 Equipment View - Power Measurements Graphic 11

2 Diagnosis Menu 132.1 Diagnosis Menu 14

2.1.1 Diagnosis Menu - NE Alarms 152.1.2 Diagnosis Menu - Alarm Monitor 162.1.3 Diagnosis Menu - Event Log 182.1.4 Diagnosis Menu - Remote Inventory 192.1.5 Diagnosis Menu - Abnormal Condition List 202.1.6 Diagnosis Menu - Summary Block Diagram View 222.1.7 Summary Block Diagram - MPT Detail 25

2.2 MPT-HL (EPS) Equipment Protection - Tx Direction 262.3 MPT-HL (HSB) Transmission Protection 272.4 MPT-HL (EPS) Equipment Protection - Rx Direction 282.5 MPT-HL Radio Protection (RPS) 292.6 Diagnosis Menu - Current Configuration View 302.7 Diagnosis Menu - Performance Monitoring (PM) 312.8 Performance Monitoring Window 342.9 Ethernet Port PM 352.10 Radio QoS Ethernet Port PM 362.11 Radio Port PM 372.12 Adaptive Modulation PM 382.13 RSL History PM 39

3 Loopback 413.1 Equipment View - Loopback Tab 42

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback 434.1 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback 444.2 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback Block Diagram 454.3 Main Equipment Window - MOD300 Card Highlighted 464.4 Settings Tab 474.5 Loopback Tab 48

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback 495.1 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback 505.2 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Block Diagram 515.3 Main Equipment Window - PDH Card Selected 525.4 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab 535.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected 545.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected 55

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback 576.1 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback 586.2 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Block Diagram 596.3 Main Equipment Window - PDH Transponder Card Selected 606.4 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab 616.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected 626.6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Active 63

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback 657.1 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback 667.2 Main Equipment Window - MPT-HC Selected 677.3 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab 68

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view! Page

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Power Measurements

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-123 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 8Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Power Measurements

1.1 Equipment Tab

Double-click icon to be monitored

1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 9Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Power Measurements

1.2 Measurements Tab

Click Measurements tab2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 10Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Power Measurements

1.3 Equipment View - Measurements Tab

Select channel to measure

3

Set parameters for power measurement

4

Click Start to show real-time Power Measurement Graph

5

The Measurement screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement.

‘Measurement interval’ fields allow the operator to set the time duration of the measurement. The default is Days: 7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7-day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval.

‘Sample time’ field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. The choice is among 2, 4, 6, 30, 60 sec.

The last section of the dialog is referred to an optional Power Measurement Log file that can be created.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 11Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Power Measurements

1.4 Equipment View - Power Measurements Graphic

Verify the transmit (Ptx) and receive (Prx) power.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 12Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Power Measurements

1.4 Equipment View - Power Measurements Graphic [cont.]

These were taken at the same time. Why are the RX End measurements different than the other channel’s measurements?

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 14Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 15Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.1 Diagnosis Menu - NE Alarms

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-113 for more details

Select Diagnosis>Alarms>NE Alarms

orClick Alarm Monitor

Alarms from more than one NE can be monitored simultaneously:

1. Open new instance of NEtO

2. Enter IP address for new element you wish to monitor

3. Click OK

4. Click Alarm Monitor button

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 16Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.2 Diagnosis Menu - Alarm Monitor

The Alarm Monitor allows the user to view current alarms and a log of alarm activity.

The Alarm Monitor allows the user to view alarms by severity.CURRENT_ALARMS: GlobalALARM_LOG: GlobalCURRENT_ALARMS: CRI (Critical)CURRENT_ALARMS: MAJ (Major)CURRENT_ALARMS: MIN (Minor)CURRENT_ALARMS: WRN (Warning)CURRENT_ALARMS: IND (Indeterminate)ALARM_LOG: CRI (Critical)ALARM_LOG: MAJ (Major)ALARM_LOG: MIN (Minor)ALARM_LOG: WRN (Warning)ALARM_LOG: IND (Indeterminate)ALARM_LOG: CLR (Cleared)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 17Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 17

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.2 Diagnosis Menu - Alarm Monitor [cont.]

Click on any alarm type

1

Double-click on any alarm for full details

2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 18Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.3 Diagnosis Menu - Event Log

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-129 for more details

Print

ExportRefresh

The FRIENDLY NAME/ENTITY column identifies location of the alarming entity. The syntax is as follows:

r = rack number [01]

s = subrack (for MSS-4 and MSS-8 shelf equals [1], for MPT-HL Transceivers equals P8ETH slot number [3-8] and SFP port number [5-8] associated with MPTHL Transceiver, for ODUs equals MOD300 slot number [3-8] associated with ODU300, for MPT-HC Transceivers equals MPTACC slot number [3-8] and Ethernet port number [1-4] associated with MPT-HC Transceiver or MPT-HC Transceivers equals CSM slot number [1] and Ethernet port number [1-6] associated with MPT-HC Transceiver

Slot# = slot number of card in alarm [01-09]

board# = slot number of card in alarm [01-09]

b = board # (slot number of card in alarm [01-09])

Port# = port number of facility in alarm (for DS1 equals [01-32], for DS3 equals [01-02], for Ethernet facility associated with CSM equals [1-6], for Ethernet facility associated with P8ETH equals [1-8])

Radio/Dir# = radio direction of radio channel in alarm (for MPT-HLs equals P8ETH slot number [3-8] . SFP port number [5-8], for ODU300 equals MOD300 slot number [3-8], for MPT-HC equals MPTACC slot number [3-8] . port number [1-4] or CSM slot number [1] . port number [1-6])

Ch# = channel number of radio channel in alarm for main channel equals 0 1, for spare channel equals 1 0

Daughter# = SFP port number (for CSM equals [5-6], for P8ETH equals [5-8]

MAU = Customer Ethernet signal

The following examples illustrate how to interpret the probable cause and friendly name combinations:

Example: Probable Cause: Replaceable Unit Missing

Friendly Name: r01s1/board#8

Translation: Missing card at r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf)) /board#8 [provisioned for slot #8]

Friendly Name: r01s1b3/daughter#5

• Translation: Missing SFP at r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf)) b3 (P8ETH), SFP port #5]

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 19Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.4 Diagnosis Menu - Remote Inventory

This screen is a read-only screen, which shows information about the equipment

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 20Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.5 Diagnosis Menu - Abnormal Condition List

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-114 for more details

Select Diagnosis>Abnormal Condition List

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 21Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 21

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.5 Diagnosis Menu - Abnormal Condition List [cont.]

The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the abnormal conditions currently active in the NE.

An abnormal condition is generated each time a non-usual condition is present in the NE, detected automatically (i.e., automatic Tx mute) or as consequence of management systems operation (i.e., force switching, loopbacks, manual Tx mute).

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 22Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The summary block diagram view provides a logical view of the radio configuration, a synthesis of alarms, and the state of performance monitoring ports and loopbacks.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.6 Diagnosis Menu - Summary Block Diagram View

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, WebEML Craft Terminal Reference

Guide for more details

Select Diagnosis>Summary Block Diagram view

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 23Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.6 Diagnosis Menu - Summary Block Diagram View [cont.]

Each entity has an alarm indicator (colored ball icon) which indicates its status. The alarm indicators update automatically with changes to the entity alarm status.

The current configuration of the MSS-8 shelf is displayed including the equipped card types (CSM-E/Core-E, PDH [DS1/3], MPTACC, MOD300, or EAS/P8ETH), provisioned protection schemes, and provisioned cross-connections between the different equipment ports.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 24Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.6 Diagnosis Menu - Summary Block Diagram View [cont.]

Double-click on icons to open associated screens

In the summary block diagram view, the current configuration of the MSS shelf is displayed including the equipped card types (CSM, PDH [DS1/3], MPTACC, MOD300 or P8ETH), provisioned protection schemes, and provisioned cross connections between the different equipment ports.

Each entity has an alarm indicator (colored ball icon) which indicates the alarm status of the entity. Refer to Severity Alarm Synthesis Area for definitions of supported alarm severities and their associated colors. The alarm indicators update automatically with changes to the entity alarm status.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 25Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 25

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2.1 Diagnosis Menu

2.1.7 Summary Block Diagram - MPT Detail

Double-click on Slot 3 Port 5 (RF section)

Active signal paths, TX, and RX are displayed with a green line, including all possible switching paths and the current status of the switch. The active signal path updates automatically with changes to the protection switch state (EPS, HSB, and Rx Radio).

Some slots and ports display an icon representing Loopback. When the loopback icon is present the associated slot or port supports a loopback feature. When a loopback is active the icon is displayed green. While in a detail view, double-clicking the loopback icon navigates the user to the associated loopback tab.

Navigation options available from the summary block diagram view include:

detailed block diagrams

Ethernet Physical Interface tab

Synchronization tab

Protection Schemes tab

Performance Monitoring Tool

Loopback tab

TMN Local Interface tab

Abnormal Condition List

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 26Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

GigE IF

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.2 MPT-HL (EPS) Equipment Protection - Tx Direction

/Framer

MPT-HL

Modem

Modem

RF

RF

EPS Tx

Modem RF

EPS Tx

Modem RF

GigE IF QOS/Framer

QOS/Framer

The diagram shows the transmission data path (i.e., EAS/P8ETH to MPT-HL Radio).

The green lines show the data path that is carrying traffic frames.

The red line shows the inactive data path.

The blue box shows the active MPT-HL instance.

The traffic frames are bridged after the QoS/Framer block and sent to an EPS-Tx selector on the local board and to an EPS-Tx selector on the mate board.

The frames are sent to the mate board over the MPT-HL shelf backplane.

The selectors on each MPT-HL board are positioned to select traffic from the active board.

The Modem blocks on each board receive the exact same data.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 27Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 27

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 27

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.3 MPT-HL (HSB) Transmission Protection

Modem

Modem

RF

RF

EPS - Tx

Modem RF

EPS - Tx

Modem RF

TPS - TxTPS Logic

TPS Logic

Transmission Protection Switching (TPS)- Hot Standby (HSB) is supported when the MPT-HL instances are configured in any of the 1+1 HSB protection schemes.

The diagram shows the transmission data path (i.e., EAS/P8ETH to Radio) for TPS.

The green lines show the data path that is carrying traffic frames.

The red line shows the inactive data path.

The blue box shows the active MPT-HL instance.

The traffic frames are bridged after the QoS/Framer block and sent an EPS-Tx selector on the local board and to an EPS-Tx selector on the mate board. The frames are sent to the mate board over the MPT-HL shelf backplane.

The EPS-Tx selectors on each MPT-HL board are positioned to select traffic from the active board. The Modem blocks on each board receive the exact same data.

The RF block on each MPT-HL instance (i.e., main and spare) supplies a transmit signal to the TPS-Tx selector. The TPS-Tx selector is an external relay switch.

The TPS decision machines on the MPT-HL instances will coordinate which transmit signal to use based on failures and manual switch commands. The TPS switching decisions are completely independent of the EPS switch status of the MPT-HL.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 28Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 28

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 28

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.4 MPT-HL (EPS) Equipment Protection - Rx Direction

Modem

Modem

RF

RF

Modem RFGigE

IF

EPSRx A

lignment

RPSRx

Mod

em

RFGigEIF

EPSRx

Alig

nmen

tRPSRx

QOS/Framer

QOS/Framer

The figure shows the reception data path (i.e., Radio to EAS/P8ETH).

The green lines show the data paths that are carrying traffic frames.

The red line shows the inactive data path.

The blue box shows the active MPT-HL instance.

The selector on each MPT-HL board is positioned to select traffic if the board is active and to discard traffic if the board is standby.

As a result, no traffic frames are sent from the standby MPT-HL towards the EAS/P8ETH module in MSS shelf.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 29Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 29

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 29

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.5 MPT-HL Radio Protection (RPS)

Modem

Modem RF

RF

Modem RF

EPSRx

Alignm

ent

RPSRx

Mod

em

RF

EPSRx

Alig

nmen

t

RPSRx

RPS Logic

RPS Logic

GigEIF

GigEIF

QOS/Framer

QOS/Framer

Radio Protection Switching (RPS) is supported when the MPT-HL instances are configured in any of the 1+1 protection schemes.

The diagram shows the relationship between the RPS logic instances.

The radio frames coming from the Modem block are bridged and sent to the Alignment block on the local board and to the Alignment block on the mate board.

The Alignment block aligns the frames to compensate for the delay differences in each radio path so that a hitless switch between the paths is possible.

The RPS-Rx logic will control the selector based on the highest quality signal as well as factoring in the user switch commands.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 30Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 30

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 30

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The Current Configuration View displays the current system configuration information

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.6 Diagnosis Menu - Current Configuration View

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-116 for more details

Select Diagnosis>Current Configuration View

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 31

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 31

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.7 Diagnosis Menu - Performance Monitoring (PM)

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-122 for more details

Select Diagnosis>Performance Monitoring

orClick Alarm Monitor

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 32Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 32

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 32

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.7 Diagnosis Menu - Performance Monitoring (PM) [cont.]

PM provides a QoS indication for the Radio and Link Hop Sections:Radio Hop - Unprotected radio channel (before RPS in 1+1 radio configurations)Link Hop - Protected radio channel (after RPS in 1+1 radio configurations)

Adaptive Modulation PM captures the modulation scheme used on the Tx side when adaptive modulation is enabled. In 1+1 HSB radio configuration, the statistics are associated with the link level after RPS. Not supported in 1+1 FD radio configurations.

Defect second:Radio Hop Section - second in which an LOF or DemFail occursLink Hop Section - second in which an LOF occurs at the link level after RPS

Errored Block:Radio Hop Section - number of errored blocks

Link Hop Section - number of errored block at the link level after RPS

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 33Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 33

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 33

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.7 Diagnosis Menu - Performance Monitoring (PM) [cont.]

Four PM counters are supported:Errored Second (ES) - When a defect second is set or if there is at least one or more errored blocks.Severely Errored Seconds (SES) - When a defect second is set and if the errored block count is greater or equal to 30% of the blocks in one second.Background Block Error (BBE) - The number of block errors in a one second period and the second is not an SES.Unavailable Seconds (UAS) - A time period starting after ten consecutive SES events are detected. The qualifying ten consecutive SES seconds are included in the UAS time period. Ending upon the detection of ten consecutive non SES events. These non SES seconds are not included in the UAS time period.

PM data is collected for 15 minute and 24 hour time periods. One current register and 96 history reports are available for 15 minute period. One current register and 8 history reports are available for 24 hour time period.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 34Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 34

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 34

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.8 Performance Monitoring Window

Select Ethernet Statistics

1

Select card to monitor

2

Click PM Status icon

3

Physical Level Management (PLM) is in charge of the complete management of the PM on CSM-E/Core-E monitoring points (radio hop and link):

monitoring activation/deactivationcollection of PM counters values by means of a periodic polling (1 Sec.) on HW componentsstoring of the PM counters value that can be retrieved by Infomodel Level Management (ILM) on requestgeneration and management of history datamanagement of the thresholds configuration used for threshold crossing alarm (TCA) managementThreshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) and Unavailable Time alarms detection and reporting to ILM

The CT/NMS will monitor only the counters related to Ethernet traffic.

TTO (Total Transmitted Octets)TTF (Total Transmitted Frames)TDF (Total Discarded Frames)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 35Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 35

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 35

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.9 Ethernet Port PM

Ethernet PM provides an indication of the QoS for the Ethernet port. Two groups of Ethernet PM are available:

Ethernet Aggregate Tx PM supports the following counters:

Total Transmitted Octets (TTO)—Equals the number of good transmitted Octets on the port.

Total Transmitted Frames (TTF)—Equals the total number of good transmitted frames on the port.

Total Discarded Frames (TDF)—Equals the number of transmitted frames discarded on the port.

TTF Unicast—Equals the number of good transmitted Unicast frames on the port.

TTF Multicast—Equals the number of good transmitted Multicast frames on the port.

TTF Broadcast—Equals the number of good transmitted Broadcast frames on the port.

Ethernet Aggregate Rx PM supports the following counters:

Total Received Octets (TRO)—Equals the number of received octets on the port including; good, FCS, Alignment errors, undersized, fragment, and oversized packets.

Total Received Frames (TRF)—Equals the number of received frames on the port including; good, FCS, Alignment errors, undersized, fragment, and oversized packets.

Total Received Frames (TRSEF)—Equals the number of received errored frames on the port including; FCS, Alignment errors, undersized, fragment, and oversized packets.

Total Discarded Frames (TDF)—Equals the number of received frames discarded.

TRF Unicast—Equals the number of good received Unicast frames on the port.

TRF Multicast—Equals the number of good received Multicast frames on the port.

TRF Broadcast—Equals the number of good received Broadcast frames on the port.

Radio QoS Ethernet statistics are related to radio QoS queues (queues 1 to 5) for each Tx radio direction. Radio QoS Ethernet PM supports the following counters per queue:

Total Transmitted Octets (TTO)—Equals the number of good transmitted Octets on the port.

Total Transmitted Frames (TTF)—Equals the total number of good transmitted frames on the port.

Total Discarded Frames (TDF)—Equals the number of transmitted frames discarded on the port.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 36

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 36

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.10 Radio QoS Ethernet Port PM

Radio Ethernet PM provides an indication of the QoS for the radio Ethernet port. The Radio QoS Ethernet statistics are related to radio QoS queues (queues 1 to 5) for each Tx radio direction. Queue

5 is the highest priority queue and queue 1 is the lowest priority queue

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 37Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 37

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 37

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.11 Radio Port PM

Radio Hop Section and Link Hop Section are defined as follows:

Radio Hop Section-The unprotected radio channel (before RPS in 1+1 radio configurations)

Link Hop Section-The protected radio channel (after RPS); Only supported in 1+1 radio configurations.

Adaptive Modulation PM captures the modulation scheme used on the Tx side when adaptive modulation is enabled. In 1+1 HSB radio configuration, the statistics are associated with the link level after RPS. Adaptive Modulation PM is not supported in 1+1 FD radio configurations.

Defect second on a radio hop section, is a second in which an LOF or DemFail occurs.

Defect second on a link hop section, is a second in which an LOF occurs at the link level after RPS.

Errored Block count for a radio hop section equals the number of errored blocks.

Errored Block count for a link hop section equals the number of link level errored blocks after RPS.

Four PM counters are supported as follows:

Errored Second (ES)-When a defect second is set or if there is at least one or more errored blocks.

Severely Errored Seconds (SES)-When a defect second is set and if the errored block count is greater or equal to 30% of the blocks in one second.

Background Block Error (BBE)-The number of block errors in a one second period and the second is not an SES.

Unavailable Seconds (UAS)-A time period starting after ten consecutive SES events are detected. The qualifying ten consecutive SES seconds are included in the UAS time period. Ending upon the detection of ten consecutive non SES events. These non SES seconds are not included in the UAS time period.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 38

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 38

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.12 Adaptive Modulation PM

Adaptive Modulation PM captures the modulation scheme used for the transmitter when adaptive

modulation is enabled. In 1+1 HSB radio configuration, the statistics are associated with the link

level after Radio Protection Switching. Adaptive Modulation PM is not supported in 1+1 FD radio

configurations.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 39

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 39

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Diagnosis Menu

2.13 RSL History PM

RSL History PM provides an indication of the radio power levels of the transmitters and receivers associated with the Radio Hop Section and Radio Link Section for both the local and far-end. Additionally, RSL History PM captures the TPS and RPS switch statuses, and HBER alarms for both the local and the far-end.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 40

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 40

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 41

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 41

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Loopback

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 42Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 42

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 42

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Loopback

3.1 Equipment View - Loopback Tab

Loopback indicates entity has a loopback activated at the near end.

When the loopback is activated the traffic received from the radio side is redirected toward the radio itself.

When loop is enabled

TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are looped back with source and destination MAC address swapped.

Generic Ethernet flows are dropped.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 43

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 43

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-130 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 44Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 44

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 44

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.1 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

IF cable loopback is active only on the cross-connections associated with TDM2TDM and TDM2Eth profiles. Loopback of Ethernet traffic is not supported.

Can be activated from the local NE only

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 45Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 45

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 45

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.2 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback Block Diagram

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 46Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 46

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 46

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.3 Main Equipment Window - MOD300 Card Highlighted

Double-click the MOD300 card

1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 47Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 47

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 47

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.4 Settings Tab

Double-click icon to be monitored

1

Select Adaptive Modulation

2

Click TxMute Enable3

Click Apply4

Click Yes5

Click OK6

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 48Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 48

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 48

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 MOD300 IF Cable Loopback

4.5 Loopback Tab

Select Loopback tab1

Enter Timeout Period4

Select IF cable2

Select Active radio button3

Click Apply5

Click Apply6

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 49

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 49

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-133 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 50Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 50

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 50

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.1 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback uses the signal from the CSM-E/Core-E switch matrix to be transmitted by the PDH transponder card and replaces the signal received by the PDH transponder and sends the signal back to the CSM-E/Core-E switch matrix

Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback is a drop-and-continue internalloopback

Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback can be activated on a per tributary basis independent of the other PDH tributaries.

Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback is supported on DS1 and DS3 tributaries

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 51Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 51

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 51

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.2 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Block Diagram

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 52Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 52

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 52

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.3 Main Equipment Window - PDH Card Selected

Double-click the PDH transponder card associated with the tributary

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 53Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 53

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 53

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.4 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab

Select Loopback tab

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 54Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 54

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 54

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected

Select DS1 Port#nn/External

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 55Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 55

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 55

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

5.6 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Active

Select Active1

Click Apply3

Enter Timeout Period (4 days maximum)

2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 56Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 56

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 56

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 57

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 57

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-134 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 58Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 58

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 58

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.1 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback mode uses the received line tributary input signal to the PDH transponder card and sends the signal back to the transmit line tributary output signal

Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback is a drop-and-continue line externalloopback

Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback can be activated on a per tributary basis independent of the other PDH tributaries.

Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback is only supported on DS1 tributaries (P32E1DS1 card)

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 59Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 59

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 59

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.2 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Block Diagram

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 60Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 60

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 60

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.3 Main Equipment Window - PDH Transponder Card Selected

Double-click the PDH transponder card associated with the tributary

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 61Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 61

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 61

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.4 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab

Select Loopback tab

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 62Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 62

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 62

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.5 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab DS1 Port#07 Selected

Select DS1 Port#nn/External

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 63Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 63

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 63

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback

6.6 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback Active

Select Active1

Click Apply3

Enter Timeout Period (4 days maximum)

2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 64Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 64

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 64

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 65

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 65

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-143 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 66Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 66

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 66

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

7.1 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

Radio Facing Circuit Loopback mode is an internal loopback that uses the receive data interface signal on the MPT-HC Transceiver and replaces the signal to be transmitted by the MPT-HC Transceiver and sends the receive signal back to the far-end MPT-HC Transceiver.

Only possible to enable on the aggregate trafficLoop and continue processMPT-HC Transceiver transmit traffic will be droppedWhen this loopback is activated the expected behavior is as follows:

TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are forwarded back to Core card with source and destination MAC addresses swapped.

For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same value, the loopback works.For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx is different form ECID Rx, the loopback fails.

Generic Ethernet flows are dropped.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 67Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 67

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 67

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

7.2 Main Equipment Window - MPT-HC Selected

Double-click the MPT-HC to be monitored

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 68Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 68

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 68

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

7 Radio Facing Circuit Loopback

7.3 PDH Main View - Loopback Tab

Select Active3

Click Apply5

Enter Timeout Period (4 days maximum)

4

Select Loobback tab1

Select RADIOFACING3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 69Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 69

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 69

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

Power MeasurementsAlarmsEvent LogRemote InventoryAbnormal Condition ListSummary Block Diagram ViewCurrent Configuration ViewPerformance Monitoring IconLoopback

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-8 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 70Section 4 · Module 3 · Page 70

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Performance Monitoring4 · 3 · 70

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of modulePerformance Monitoring

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2012

Module 4Alarm MonitorTWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4NE Operation

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionallyDocument History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2009-07-27 Robinson, Ken First edition

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03 2012-02-07 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Recognize the meaning of Status and Alarm LEDsFind MPT-HL alarm display using Equipment MenuFind alarm display using Diagnosis MenuFind alarm display using Alarm MonitorList some causes of MPT-HL alarmsList details of an alarmDescribe MPT-HL Receive Signal Level (RSL) history

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 5

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 Alarm LEDs 71.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card 81.2 EAS/P8ETH Card 91.3 MPTACC Card 101.4 MOD300 111.5 AUX Card 121.6 MPT-HL Transceiver 131.7 Fan 2U Card with Alarms 141.8 MSS-1c 15

2 Alarms in Network Overview 172.1 Alarm Synthesis 182.2 Alarm Supervision 19

3 Alarm in Main Views 213.1 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panels 223.2 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panel LEDs 233.3 Equipment View - MPT-HL - Alarms 24

4 Alarm Monitor 254.1 Alarm Monitor 264.2 Monitoring Multiple Networks 274.3 Alarm Monitor 284.4 Alarm Details 29

5 MPT-HL RSL History 335.1 RSL History 345.2 View RSL History - Online 365.3 View RSL History - Offline 42

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 6

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view!

This page is left blank intentionally

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 7

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Alarm LEDs

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 8

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Alarm LEDs

1.1 CSM-E/Core-E Card

S - Module StatusNE m - minor alarm

NE M - Major alarm

NE A - Abnormal alarmNE W - Warning alarm

ActivityLink Reset

Check front-panel LED indications

INDICATOR STATUS DEFINITIONLink (L) Off Link Down

Green Link Up

Activity (A) Off No Tx/Rx activityBlinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

NE Major Alarm (M) Red At least one alarm is present on the NE with major severity is present on the NE

NE Minor Alarm (m) Red At least one alarm is present on the NE with minor severity is present on the NE

NE Warning Alarm (W) Yellow At least one alarm is present on the NE with warning severity is present on the NE

NE Abnormal Condition (A) Yellow At least one abnormal condition is present on the NE

Status (S) Off Card not equipped, not provisioned, or not poweredGreen Blinking Download, software Booting, or flash card realignment in progressGreen In Service, Normal Operation, and Properly ProvisionedYellow In protect, properly provisioned as EPSRed Card failBlinking Red Card mismatch

Always check to see if symptoms match the alarm.

LEDs provide summary alarm indications, which can help narrow down the location and type of failure.

The LEDs on the CSM-E/Core-E front panel for each Ethernet connector are a good indicator of correct connectivity and activity on the Ethernet port.

Where a Status LED on a plug-in is off (unlit), but power to the MSS-8 is confirmed by LEDs on other plug-ins, check the seating of the affected plug-in.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 9

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Alarm LEDs

1.2 EAS/P8ETH Card

Link (L) Off Link DownGreen Link Up

Activity (A) Off No Tx/Rx activityBlinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

S - Module Status

ActivityLink

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 10

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Alarm LEDs

1.3 MPTACC Card

Link (L) Off Link DownGreen Link Up

Activity (A) Off No Tx/Rx activityBlinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

Power Emission Status ( ) LEDOff No output power (e.g.: hot-standby transmitter,

software booting, or FPGA download in progress)Green Normal output powerYellow Forced squelch enabled on craft terminal or unit is in

protectRed Abnormal output power

M – Power Emission Status

S - Module Status

ActivityLink

- Power Emission Status 1 - Power Emission Status 2

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 11

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

- Power Emission Status

1 Alarm LEDs

1.4 MOD300

Power Emission Status ( ) LEDOff No output power (e.g.: hot-standby transmitter,

software booting, or FPGA download in progress)Green Normal output powerYellow Forced squelch enabled on craft terminalRed Abnormal output power

S – Module Status

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 12

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Alarm LEDs

1.5 AUX Card

EOW Line Status (E) LED (for future use)

The AUX card provides 13 housekeeping alarms:6 station alarm inputs7 station alarm outputsThe MSS-4/8 shelves support up to one AUX card per shelf.

S - Module Status

E - EOW Line Status

Housekeeping

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 13

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Alarm LEDs

1.6 MPT-HL Transceiver

Link (L) Off Link DownGreen Link Up

Activity (A) Off No Tx/Rx activityBlinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

Power Emission Status ( ) LEDOff No output power (e.g.: TPS in standby, software

booting, or FPGA download in progress)Blinking Green No output power (forced squelch enabled on craft

terminal (TX mute active, PA in Off position)Green Normal output power

Activity

Link

S - Module Status

- Power Emission Status

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 14

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Alarm LEDs

1.7 Fan 2U Card with Alarms

SummaryMajor

Minor

FanBatt A

Batt B

ACO/LT

Indicator LED Description Alarm Output Pins StatusFan Not supported

Batt A Not supported

Batt B Not supported

Summary On Major or Minor alarm present 1 14 & 15 NC

Major Red Major alarm present 2 8 & 10 NO

Minor Yellow Minor alarm present 3 4 & 5 NO

ACO/LT Unused

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 15

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Alarm LEDs

1.8 MSS-1c

NE m - minor alarm

NE M - Major alarm

NE A - Abnormal alarm

NE W - Warning alarm

ActivityLink

MPT 1 - Status

Check front-panel LED indications

INDICATOR STATUS DEFINITIONLink (L) Off Link Down

Green Link Up

Activity (A) Off No Tx/Rx activityBlinking Yellow Tx/Rx activity

Major Alarm (M) Red At least one alarm is present on the NE with major severity

Minor Alarm (m) Red At least one alarm is present on the NE with minor severity (not supported)

Warning Alarm (W) Yellow At least one alarm is present on the NE with warning severity (not supported)

Abnormal Condition (A) Yellow At least one abnormal condition is present on the NE

- Tx Power muted by operator- ACM frozen by operator- MPT loopback active

MPT1 Off MPT is not emitting power according with the known configurationGreen MPT is emitting power as expected according the known configurationYellow MPT is not emitting power due to a forced Squelch conditionRed MPT is ABNORMALLY emitting power

MPT2 (not supported)

At start-up the MSS-1c:lights on all the alarm LEDs (Major, Minor, Warning and Abnormal)lights on the MPT LED as yellow, then this LED will be green, red, or yellow, as explained above.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 16

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 17

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Alarms in Network Overview

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 18

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Alarms in Network Overview

2.1 Alarm Synthesis

1

When you are connected to an NE, you get an Alarm overview.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 19

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Alarms in Network Overview

2.2 Alarm Supervision 1

Default Alarm colors

Major alarm

Minor alarm

Warning alarm

Indeterminate

No Active alarms

Green - ongoing supervisionRed - NE link not workingGray - supervision not active

(Also appears in System Tray)

Displays Summary of all Active Alarms for this NE

Icon in system tray displays highest alarm level in NE

Icon in System Tray (highest alarm level in NE)Gray: Supervision is not active

Red: Highest alarm is Critical

Orange: Highest alarm is Major

Yellow: Highest alarm is Minor

Cyan: Highest alarm is Warning

Blue: Highest alarm is Indeterminate

Green: No Active Alarms

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 20

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 21

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Alarm in Main Views

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 22

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Alarm in Main Views

3.1 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panels

Local Access: Granted

Operation State Enabled: Communications Link Up

Supervision State: Supervised

OS: Not Connected

NTP Protocol Enabled: Both Servers Reachable

Abnormal Conditions: False

Domain Alarm Synthesis Area

Status Control Area

After Show is selected and login is complete

Domain Alarm Synthesis PanelEXT - External Point (Housekeeping alarm). EQP – Equipment alarm TRS – Transmission alarm

Management State Control PanelPut mouse over icon to read state.

Icon with a key symbol: Local Access state: indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the Operation System (OS).COM icon: Operational state: indicates whether or not the communication with the OS is established. SUP icon: Supervision state: indicates whether or not the NE is under OS supervision. ALI icon: Alignment state.OS icon: OS isolation.NTP (Network Time Protocol) Server Status icon.AC icon: Abnormal Condition state indicates whether some abnormal conditions have been recognized. The operator can visualize them with the Diagnosis-> Abnormal Condition List menu.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 23

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Alarm in Main Views

3.2 NE Main View - Alarm & State Panel LEDs

ORANGE LEDLEDGREEN LEDLEDCYAN LEDLEDRed LEDLED

Local Access StateGREEN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted).CYAN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not received OS permission to manage the NE (denied).

COM – NE reachable/unreachableGREEN LED: Identifies the “Enable” operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (link up).RED LED: Identifies the “Disable” operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (link down).

SUP – Supervision stateGREEN LED: NE is under supervision ORANGE LED: NE is not under supervision

ALI – Alignment state of the EML manager and NE MIB.GREEN LED: Configuration is aligned (is equal between EML manager and NE MIB).ORANGE LED: Configuration is not aligned (is not equal between EML manager and NE MIB).

OS – OS isolationGREEN LED: NE is not managed by the 1353SH.CYAN LED: NE is managed by the 1353SH.

NTP – Network Timing ProtocolORANGE LED: Protocol disabledGREEN LED: Protocol enabled, but the two servers are unreachable.CYAN LED: Protocol enabled and one of the two servers is reachable.

AC – Abnormal ConditionGREEN LED: Normal operating condition.CYAN LED: Detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: switch forcing.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 24

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Alarm in Main Views

3.3 Equipment View - MPT-HL - Alarms

Select Equipment tab1

Select Alarms tab2

Possible ProblemsAutomatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) High Power Timeout indicates that the local transmitter was

operating continuously at full power for 5-minutes, and the transmitter power was reduced to its minimum power setting.

ATPC Loop indicates loss of ATPC command path between far end transmitter and local receiver.

TxMute indicates a manual or automatic mute command has been executed. Using Craft Terminal, release TxMute.

Incompatible PTX indicates the configured transmit power value is not supported by the MPT.

MPT-HL not Responding indicates a loss of communications with the MPT. Replace MPT-HL module. If MPT-HL still not responding, replace communication link between MPT-HL and CSM-E/Core-E or EAS/P8ETH.

MPT-HL Replacement NotesAlways verify component state again before removal.

In an unprotected radio, performing the MPT-HL removal and replacement procedure will cause loss of traffic.

Remove battery power to MPT. Disconnect cable from SFP. Loosen four shelf mounting screws and remove MPT.

When replacing MPT-HL slowly push replacement MPT-HL into shelf making sure contact is made with backplane connectors.

After replacement, verify MPT-HL alarms are cleared and MPR is capable of carrying traffic.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 25

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Alarm Monitor

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-113 for more details

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 26

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Alarm Monitor

4.1 Alarm Monitor

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 27

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 27

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 27

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Alarm Monitor

4.2 Monitoring Multiple Networks

After changing IP address or DNS name, select OK. Then select Alarm Monitor to monitor more than one Network Element.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 28

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 28

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 28

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Alarm Monitor

4.3 Alarm Monitor

Double-click on alarm for details

Alarm Monitor takes you directly to alarms screen.

ID and Password is not needed to view alarms.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 29

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 29

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 29

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Alarm Monitor

4.4 Alarm Details

When replacing fans contact next level of technical support for assistance.

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 30

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 30

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 30

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 31

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 31

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 12Alarm Monitor

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 32

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 32

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 32

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 33

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 33

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL RSL History

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-122 for more details

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 34

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 34

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 34

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.1 RSL History

• The data includes local and remote:• TX/RX power• HBER alarm status• RPS and TPS status• identifiers for both local receiver and far-end transmitter

• Each recorded log is stamped with the appropriate date and time• The log buffer is capable of storing 10,000 events• The RSL log data is not cleared when the controller is rebooted • The RSL log event storage contains the latest measured data • System monitors RSL data every 100 ms• System logs RSL data when there is a 2 dB change in any of the data

values, or change of alarms and switch status• Data resolution captures the key characteristics of a 50dB/s fade• MPT-HL automatically collects the data• The WT PM Tool is used to view the data in both online or offline mode

(not connected to NE)

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 35

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 35Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 35

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 35

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.1 RSL History [cont.]

View RSL history online:

Start Supervision of 9500 MPR

Click on the WTPMS on the NETO window and log into the 9500 MPR

In the side bar click on RSL History

Select appropriate MPT-HL

Click on “Stopped” Icon to Start transfer of RSL History to the PM Tool

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 36

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 36

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 36

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online

Select RSL History1

Select MPT-HL2

Click Stopped to start data download3

Indicates download in progress

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 37

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 37

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 37

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

Once the data has been retrieved from the MPT-HL, user can apply different views, including removing items or zooming in on the graph view

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 38

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 38

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 38

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Ability to split Working and Protect RSL

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 39

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 39

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 39

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

User can select what data they

want to see in the RSL

History

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 40

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 40

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 40

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Zoom IN or OUT

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 41

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 41

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 41

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.2 View RSL History - Online [cont.]

To save the file to view in Off-line mode:Click on the Floppy Disk IconUser will be prompted to provide a file name /description

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 42

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 42

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 42

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

5 MPT-HL RSL History

5.3 View RSL History - Offline

The RSL history file can be viewed when not connected to the NE

View RSL history online:

Once a RSL History file has been saved, it can be viewed when Not connected to NE

On the Desk top, there is an icon for WT Performance Suite - OfflLine mode

Once started, user will be prompted with what file to view

The file name begins with the IP address of the NE and then the description user gave when saving in the online mode

User can view data just like in On-line mode at this point

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 43

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 43

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 43

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

Recognize the meaning of Status and Alarm LEDsFind MPT-HL alarm display using Equipment MenuFind alarm display using Diagnosis MenuFind alarm display using Alarm MonitorList some causes of MPT-HL alarmsList details of an alarmMPT-HL RSL history

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 44

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-9 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 4 · Page 44

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Alarm Monitor4 · 4 · 44

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleAlarm Monitor

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 5Remove Cross Connections

TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4NE Operation

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2007-08-28 Robinson, Ken First edition

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2001-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03 2012-02-07 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.03

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

Remove DS1 cross-connectionsRemove DS3 cross-connectionsRemove Ethernet cross-connectionsRemove radio cross-connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections 71.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections 8

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections 152.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections 16

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections 233.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections 24

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections 314.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections 32

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view!

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 7Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-126 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 8Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

Double-click on cross-connection1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 9Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Port connection dialog box opens

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 10Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Uncheck port numbers2

Click OK3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 11Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections

1.1 Removing DS1 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors may change as appropriate

If all ports are unchecked, cross-connection line disappears

Click Apply to complete the cross-connect removal4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 12Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 13Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 13Remove DS1 Cross-Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 14Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 15Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-126 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 16Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

Double-click on cross-connection1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 17Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 17

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Port connection dialog box opens

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 18Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Uncheck port numbers2

Click OK3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 19Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

2 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections

2.1 Removing DS3 Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors may change as appropriate

If all ports are unchecked, cross-connection line disappears

Click Apply to complete the cross-connect removal4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 20Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 21Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 21

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 14Remove DS3 Cross-Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 22Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 23Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-126 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 24Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

Double-click on cross-connection1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 25Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 25

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

Flow ID dialog box opens

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 26Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

Uncheck Flow ID2

Click OK3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 27Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 27

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 27

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

3 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections

3.1 Removing Ethernet Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors may change as appropriate

If all ports are unchecked, cross-connection line disappears

Click Apply to complete the cross-connect removal4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 28Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 28

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 28

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 29Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 29

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 29

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 15Remove Ethernet Cross-Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 30Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 30

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 30

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 31Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 31

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 31

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

Refer to 9500 MPR Operation and Administration, 3EM23954AHAA, DLP-126 for more details

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 32Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 32

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 32

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

Double-click on cross-connection1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 33Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 33

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 33

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections [cont.]

Flow ID dialog box opens

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 34Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 34

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 34

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections [cont.]

Uncheck Flow ID2

Click OK3

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 35Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 35

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 35

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

4 Removing Radio Cross-Connections

4.1 Removing Radio Cross-Connections [cont.]

Color of connectors may change as appropriate

If all ports are unchecked, cross-connection line disappears

Click Apply to complete the cross-connect removal4

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 36Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 36

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 36

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 37Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 37

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 37

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 16Remove Radio Cross-Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 38Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 38

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 38

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 39Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 39

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 39

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

Removing DS1 cross-connectionsRemoving DS3 cross-connectionsRemoving Ethernet cross-connectionsRemoving radio cross-connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-10 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 40Section 4 · Module 5 · Page 40

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Remove Cross Connections4 · 5 · 40

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleRemove Cross Connections

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 6Browser Interface

TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4NE Operation

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Revised to release 3.03Moehlenkamp, John2012-02-073.03

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2007-07-30 External Consultant First edition

01.10 2008-09-30 Fisher, Sheldon Convert to ANSI version for NAR

01.20 2009-01-21 Fisher, Sheldon Revisions after Pilot Class

01.31 2009-03-05 Fisher, Sheldon Final Revisions

01.40 2009-06-23 Robinson, Ken Revised to release 2.0

01.41 2009-07-27 Robinson, Ken Revised after review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-02-28 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to connect to a 9500 MPR-A using a Web browser:

Check Date and Time SettingsPrint Configuration InformationLicense InformationCheck DHCP status

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page

1 Browser Interface 71.1 Browser Interface 81.2 Browser Interface - Logon 91.3 Browser Interface - Alarm Screen 101.4 Browser Interface - Date & Time Setting 111.5 Browser Interface - Date & Time NTP Enabled 121.6 Browser Interface - Configuration Info 131.7 Browser Interface - DHCP 151.8 Browser Interface - License Info 161.9 Community Strings Setting 171.10 Browser Interface - Logout 18

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view!

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 7Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 8Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1. Be sure your computer is connected to a network that is connected to the Craft Port (MGMT Port)

2. Open a Web browser

3. Enter the IP address of the 9500 MPR and click “Go” or press Enter

Example:

1 Browser Interface

1.1 Browser Interface

This is another method of monitoring alarms.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 9Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.2 Browser Interface - Logon

Enter logon username1

Enter logon password2

Click OK3

Your 9500 MPR username and password

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 10Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.3 Browser Interface - Alarm Screen

MainMenu Detail Area

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 11Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.4 Browser Interface - Date & Time Setting

Click Date & Time Setting1

Two methods to update NE time

2

Click Apply to NE2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 12Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.5 Browser Interface - Date & Time NTP Enabled

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 13Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.6 Browser Interface - Configuration Info

Click Configuration Info1

Click Open or Save2

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 14Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.6 Browser Interface - Configuration Info [cont.]

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 15Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.7 Browser Interface - DHCP

Click DHCP Setting1

Click Enable or Disable DHCP

2

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client/server protocol that automatically provides an Internet Protocol (IP) host with its IP address and other related configuration information such as the subnet mask and default gateway.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 16Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.8 Browser Interface - License Info

Click License Info

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.9 Community Strings Setting

The Community String (CS) acts like a password to control access to an NE. It defines what community of people can access the NE.

Two community strings are supported:

• Get CS

– Default value: public

– Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in Read mode only

• Set CS

– Default value: private

– Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in their respective modes

NOTE: Provisioning new Community Strings will cause a loss of communication on ALL NEtO session currently active.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 18Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

1 Browser Interface

1.10 Browser Interface - Logout

Click Logout to exit

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 19Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Exercise

Time allowed:

Lab Exercise 17Browser Interface

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 20Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 21Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 21

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Module summary

Connecting to a 9500 MPR-A using a Web browser Date and Time SettingsConfiguration InformationLicense InformationDHCP status

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-11 Edition 3.03

Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 22Section 4 · Module 6 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)NE Operation · Browser Interface4 · 6 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleBrowser Interface

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 1Summary

TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03

Section 5Course

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Course · Summary5 · 1 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

01.10 2008-09-30 Fisher, Sheldon Added to ANSI version for NAR

1.21 2009-01-23 Fisher, Sheldon Revise to R1.1

01.31 2009-03-05 Fisher, Sheldon Final Revisions

01.41 2009-07-02 Robinson, Ken Revised after R2.00 review

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 2.02

3.0 2011-01-25 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.03 2012-02-07 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.03

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Course · Summary5 · 1 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Course objectives

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of the 9500 MPR-ARespond to and manage alarm conditionsMonitor system and application statusMaintain 9500 MPR-A hardware and software

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Course · Summary5 · 1 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Course objectives [cont.]

This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 5

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Course · Summary5 · 1 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Course outline

We have covered the following topics in this course:

Section 1. Course OverviewModule 1. Course Overview

Section 2. ProductModule 1. Product Overview

Section 3. Product ArchitectureModule 1. MSSModule 2. MPT-HLModule 3. Outdoor Units

Section 4. OperationModule 1. GUIModule 2. Cross-ConnectionsModule 3. Diagnosis and Performance MonitoringModule 4. Alarm Monitor/RSL HistoryModule 5. Remove Cross-ConnectionsModule 6. Browser

Section 5. CourseModule 1. Summary

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-12 Edition 3.03

Section 5 · Module 1 · Page 6

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Course · Summary5 · 1 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleSummary

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 1Acronyms

TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6Terms

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.1 2011-07-04 Moehlenkamp, John First edition

3.2 2011-11-14 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

3.3 2012-02-07 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.03

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Abbreviations and acronyms

Switch to notes view!A

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

AMI Alternating Mark Inversion

ANSI American National Standards Institute

APT Active Problem Table

ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit

ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

AVC Attribute Value Change

B

BBE Background Block Error

BER Bit Error Rate

BIP Bit Interleaved Parity

C

CAS Channel Associated Signaling

CD Current Data

CES Circuit Emulation Service

CESoETH Circuit Emulation Service over Ethernet

CESoP Circuit Emulation Services over Packet

CFA Carrier Failure Alarm

CLA Common Loss Alarm

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRU Clock Reference Unit

CSM Control and Switching Module (Core module)

CSM-E Enhanced Control and Switching Module (Core module)

CT Craft Terminal

D

DC Direct Current

DL Data Link

DS Differentiated Services

DS1 Digital Signal Level 1

DS3 Digital Signal Level 3

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

DWRR Deficient Waited round Robin

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!E

EAS Ethernet Access Switch Module

EC Equipment Controller

ECID Emulation Identification

ECT Equipment Craft Terminal

EFC Ethernet Flow Control

EFD Event Forwarding Discriminator

EOW Engineering Order Wire

EPS Equipment Protection Switch

ES Errored Second

ESMC Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel

ETH Ethernet

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EW Early Warning

F

F Framing

FAS Frame Alignment Signal

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD Frequency Diversity

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

G

GFP Generic Frame Protocol

GigE Gigabit Ethernet

GNE Gateway Network Element

GPIO General Purpose I/O

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 5

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!H

HBER High Bit Error Ratio

HD History Data

HDB3 High Density order 3 Bipolar encoding

HET Hetero frequency

HQP High Queue Preempt

HS Hitless Switch

HSB Hot Standby

HSDPA High Speed Data Packet Access

HSSD Hot-Standby Space Diversity

HW Hardware

I

IDU Indoor Unit

ILM Infomodel Level Management

IM Information Model

IP Internet Protocol

ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method

ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Switching

IWF Interworking Function

J

JA Jitter Attenuator

JTAG Joint Test Action Group

JUSM Java User-based Security Model

K

L

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on D-channel

LBER Low Bit Error Ration

LIM Link Identifier Mismatch

LIU Line Interface Unit

LOF Loss Of Frame

LOS Loss Of Signal

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 6

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!M

MAC Medium Access Control

MAU Medium Attachment Unit

MCF Message Communication Function

MCT Microwave Craft Terminal

MEF8 Metro Ethernet Forum

MEN Metro Ethernet Network

MIB Management Information Base

MOD300 Radio Interface Module

MOD300EN Enhanced Radio Interface Module

MPR Microwave Packet Radio

MPT Microwave Packet Transport

MPT-HC Microwave Packet Transport – High Capacity

MPT-HL Microwave Packet Transport – High Power, Long Haul

MPT-MC Microwave Packet Transport – Medium Capacity

MRTIE Maximum Relative Time Interval Error

MSOH Multiple Section Overhead

MSS Microwave Service Switch

MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error

MXC Microwave Cross Connect

N

NE Network Element

NEtO Network Element Overview

NMS Network Management System

NNI Network Node Interface

NRZ Not Return to Zero

NSA Not Service Affecting

NTP Network Time Protocol

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!O

OC ODU Controller

ODU Outdoor Unit

ODU300 Outdoor Unit 300

OFS Out of Frame Second

OH Overhead

OMS Operations Management System

OOF Out Of Frame

OS Operation System

OSPF Open Short Path First

P

P2E3DS3 DS3 Module

P32E1DS1 DS1 Module

PDH Plesyochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PDV Packet Delay Variation

PFoE Power Feed over Ethernet

PLM Payload Mismatch

PLM Physical Level management

PM Performance Monitoring

PMMF Physical Machine Management Function

PNU Packet Node Unit

PPM Part Per Million

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence

PRS Clock Primary Reference Source Clock

PSN Packet Switched Network

PSU Power Supply Unit

PTU Packet Transport Unit

PWE3 Pseudowire emulation edge to edge

Q

QAS Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QoS Quality of Service

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!R

R99 Original standard for UMTS WCDMA based network

RAI Remote Alarm Indication

RDI Remote Defect Indication

REI Remote Error Indication

RFC Remote Frequency Control

RI Remote Inventory

RPS Radio Protection Switching

RSOH Regenerator Section Over-Head

RSL Receive Signal Level

RSSI Remote Signal Strength Indication

RTPC Remote Transmit Power Control

RTU Right To Use

RU Rack Unit

S

SA Service Affecting

SD Space Diversity

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SerDes Serializer/Deserializer

SES Severely Errored Second

SF Signal Fail

SFP Small form-factor pluggable transceiver

SGMII Serial Gigabit Media Independent Interface

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SP Spare

SP Strict Priority

SPI Serial Peripheral Interface

SW Software

SWP Software Package

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!T

TBI Ten Bit Interface

TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCO Total Cost of Ownership

TD Threshold Data

TDEV Time Deviation

TDF Total Discarded Frames

TDM Time Division Multiplexed

TDM2ETH Time Division Multiplexed To Ethernet

TDM2TDM Time Division Multiplexed To Time Division Multiplexed

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

TMN Telecommunication Management Network

TPS Transmit Protection Switching

TRCF Total Received Correct Frames

TRCO Total Received Correct Octets

TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames

TS Time Slot

TSM Transmission Systems Manager

TTF Total Transmitted Frames

TTO Total Transmitted Octets

TTP Trail Termination Point

U

UAS UnAvailable Second

UAT UnAvailable Time

UI Unit Interval

UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Abbreviations and acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!V

VC-n Virtual Container - n

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VMMF Virtual Machine Management Function

W

WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access

WebEML Web Element Manager Layer

WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access

WK Working

WRR Weighted Round Robin

WT Wireless Transmission

WTPM Wireless Transmission Performance Monitoring

X

XPIC Cross-Polarized Interference Cancellation

Y

Z

ZBTSI Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank Page

Switch to notes view!

This page intentionally left blank

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 11

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-13 Edition 3.03

Section 6 · Module 1 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Terms · Acronyms6 · 1 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleAcronyms

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 1

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

Module 1Labs

TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7Exercises

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio)Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)

TWT42013 Edition 1.1

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 2

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 2

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Blank page

This page is left blank intentionally

Revised to release 3.03Moehlenkamp, John2012-02-073.03

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2008-10-21 Fisher, Sheldon First edition

1.21 2008-11-4 Fisher, Sheldon Updated

1.30 2009-01-30 Fisher, Sheldon Update to R1.1

1.41 2009-07-02 Robinson, Ken Update to release 2.0

2.01 2010-07-30 Moehlenkamp, John Update to release 2.01

2.02 2010-11-30 Moehlenkamp, John Update to release 2.02

3.0 2011-01-25 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.0

3.01 2011-06-29 Moehlenkamp, John Revised to release 3.01

3.02 2011-11-15 Moehlenkamp, John Updated format and revised to release 3.02

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 3

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 3

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR-A R3.03 Lab Assignments (Plano Campus)

User ID Student1 Student2 Student3 Student4 Student5 Student6 Student7 Student8

Password packet packet packet packet packet packet packet packet

NE IP Address NE IP Address NE IP Address

Train01 172.22.132.215 Train02 172.22.132.150 Train03 172.22.132.

DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port E Port E

Student 1 Student 2

Student 3 Student 4

DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port E Port E

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 4

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 4

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR-A R3.03 Lab Assignments (Plano Campus) [cont.]

Student 5 Student 6

Student 7 Student 8

DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port E Port E

DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port E Port E

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 5

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 5

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR-A R3.03 Lab Assignments (On Site)

User ID Student1 Student2 Student3 Student4 Student5 Student6 Student7 Student8

Password packet packet packet packet packet packet packet packet

NE IP Address NE IP Address NE IP Address

DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port E Port E

Student 1 Student 2

Student 3 Student 4

DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port E Port E

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 6

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 6

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

9500 MPR-A R3.03 Lab Assignments (On Site) [cont.]

Student 5 Student 6

Student 7 Student 8

DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port E Port E

DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS1 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID DS3 Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port A Port A

Port B Port B

Port C Port C

Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID Eth Port Settings

NE Port # Flow ID

Port E Port E

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 7

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 7

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 1 - 9500 MPR Hardware Orientation

Go to the assigned 9500 MPR-A radio rack in the Training Lab.

1. Complete the following table. Indicate the type of card in each slot, and its function.

2. Which SFP connection on the EAS card is connected to the Main MPT? ________________________

3. Which SFP connection on the EAS card is connected to the Spare MPT? _______________________

4. Are there any other SFP connections on the EAS card? _____________________________________

Slot Type of Card Active Standby Slot Type of Card Active Standby

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 8

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 8

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 2 - Operator GUI - NEtO Overview

Reference: MSS HW Hardware Module

Preparation: Logon to Microsoft Windows on your class computer using your instructor-assigned User ID and Password.

1.Activate the NEtO application by clicking on the icon on the desktop.

2.Enter the assigned IP address for your group and click on ‘OK’.

3.Complete the following information:

Site Name:

Site Location:

4.Click on ‘Show’ to start supervision. If the supervision does not start, record the error message received.

5.When the Login dialog box opens, use the following to log on to the MSS:

Logon:

Password:

When the NE Main View opens, keep it open for the next exercise.

Alarm Color Number

Critical

Major

Minor

Warning

Indeterminate

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 9

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 9

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 3 - Operator GUI - NE Main View

Reference: MSS HW Hardware Module

Preparation1.You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must be logged onto the application and have the NE Main View open.

Compare the information in the Current Alarms table in Exercise #2 with the information in the Alarm Severity Panel in the Main View. (sample shown at top of table). Complete the information in the following table:

(sample Alarm Severity Panel)

CRI MAJ MIN WNG IND

Same Diff Same Diff Same Diff Same Diff Same Diff

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 10

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 10

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 3 - Operator GUI - NE Main View [cont.]

1. Total the number of alarms shown in the Alarm Severity Panel: _____________

2. Now total the number of alarms shown in the Domain Synthesis Panel:_______

3. Is there a difference? __________________

Click on the Synchronization Tab. What type of synchronization is being used?

________________________________________________________________________

4. Click on the Synchronization Source Tab.

5. Click on the Protection Tab. Complete the following table:

6. Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Protection Type

Slot Port CH Role Status Command Criteria

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 11

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 11

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 4 - NEtO Menus

Reference: MSS HW Hardware Module

Preparation1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must be logged onto the application and have the NE Main View open.

Click on the Views Menu. Compare clicking on each of the last four selections of the

Menu with clicking on the Tabs in the Equipment view.

Click on the Configuration Menu.

1. What is the Local Configuration IP Address. _____________________________________

2. Click on Current Configuration. Answer the following questions:

a. What is the TX frequency? _______________________________

b. What is the status of the TMN RF MANAGEMENT port? _________________________

c. What is the status of DHCP? ______________________________

d. What is the configuration of the CSM-E? _________________________

Click on the SW Download Menu. Click on the SW Status selection.

1. Committed software

a. Which Bank is Committed?_____________________________________________

b. What is the software Version? __________________________________________

2. Standby software

c. Which Bank is Standby? ______________________________________________

d. What is the software Version? __________________________________________

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 12

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 12

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 5 - MPT-HL and MOD300 Configuration

Determine MPT Provisioning

1.Select the MSS/MPT Dir#-Ch# in the Resource Tree area.

2.Determine if the selected name is highlighted in yellow. ___Yes __No

3.Determine if the selection is highlighted the MSS/MPT icon in blue. ___Yes __No

4.Double-click the blue MSS/MPT icon and the RF Settings screen should display.

5. List channel spacing

6. List modulation scheme

7. List the Rx RF Frequency

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 13

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 13

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 5 - MPT-HL and MOD300 Configuration [cont]

MPT Direction and Channel

1.Select the MPT Dir#-Ch# in the Resource Tree area. The selected name will be highlighted in yellow. This selection should also highlight the MSS/MPT icon in blue in the resource List Area.

2.Click Settings tab in Resource Detail area and complete the following:

a. List the Equipment Type

b. List the Protection scheme

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 14

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 14

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 6 - Configure DS1 Ports

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. Configure the ports according to the following information:

4. Check for any new alarms that have occurred because you configured the ports.

List them below:

Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Signal Mode Service Profile Line Coding

Framed ESF TDM2TDM B8ZS

Event Time Probable Cause Friendly Name Severity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 15

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 15

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 7 - DS1 Cross-Connections

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4. Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

5. What are the colors of the connectors before you make the cross-connection?DS1 ________________ Radio _____________

6. Make the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

7. What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?

DS1 ________________ Radio _____________

8. What is the color of the cross-connection line?

________________________________________________________________________

9. List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of making the cross-connections.

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Event Time Probable Cause Friendly Name Severity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 16

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 16

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 8 - Configure DS3 Ports

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

Configure the ports according to the following information:

3. Check for any new alarms that have occurred because you configured the ports.

List them below:

Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Signal Mode Service Profile

Framed TDM2TDM

Event Time Probable Cause Friendly Name Severity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 17

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 17

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 9 - DS3 Cross-Connections

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4. Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

5. What are the colors of the connectors before you make the cross-connection?DS3 ________________ Radio _____________

6. Make the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

7. What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?

DS3 ________________ Radio _____________

8. What is the color of the cross-connection line?

________________________________________________________________________

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of making the cross-connections.

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Event Time Probable Cause Friendly Name Severity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 18

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 18

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 10 - Configure Ethernet Port

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1 ports configured in Lab Exercise # 5.

Configure the port according to the following information:

4. Check for any new alarms that have occurred because you configured the Port. List

them below:

Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Port Status Auto Negotiation Status Flow Control

Enabled Enabled Enabled

Event Time Probable Cause Friendly Name Severity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 19

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 19

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 11 - Ethernet Cross-Connections

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4. Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

5. What are the colors of the connectors before you make the cross-connection?

Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________

6. Make the cross-connection as follows:

7. What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?

Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________

8. What is the color of the cross-connection line?

________________________________________________________________________

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of making the cross-connections.

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Event Time Probable Cause Friendly Name Severity

Event Time Probable Cause Friendly Name Severity

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 20

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 20

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 12 - Alarm Monitor

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4. You must have made the DS1 cross-connections in Lab Exercise 9.

5. Go to the Alarm Monitor.

6. View all current alarms.

7. View all current Major alarms.

8. Double-click on one of the alarms to open the help screen.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 21

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 21

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 13 - Remove DS1 Cross-Connections

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4. You must have made the DS1 cross-connections in Lab Exercise 9.

5. Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

6. Remove the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

7. What are the colors of the connectors before you make the cross-connection?

DS1 ________________ Radio _____________

8. What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?

DS1 ________________ Radio _____________

9. Did the cross-connection line disappear? Yes ____________ No _____________

10. If the cross-connection line disappeared, explain why that happened:

____________________________________________________________________________________

11. If the cross-connection line did not disappear, explain why it is still there:

____________________________________________________________________________________

12. List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of removing the cross-connections.

13. Disable the DS1 ports you configured in Lab Exercise # 5.

14. Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Severity Event Time Entity Probable Cause

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 22

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 22

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 14 - Remove DS3 Cross-Connections

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4. You must have made the DS1 cross-connections in Lab Exercise 9.

Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

Remove the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

What were the colors of the connectors before you made the cross-connection?

DS3 ________________ Radio _____________

What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?

DS3 ________________ Radio _____________

Did the cross-connection line disappear? Yes ____________ No _____________

If the cross-connection line disappeared, explain why that happened:

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

If the cross-connection line did not disappear, explain why it is still there:

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of removing the cross-connections.

Disable the DS1 ports you configured in Lab Exercise # 5.

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Severity Event Time Entity Probable Cause

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 23

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 23

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 15 - Remove Ethernet Cross-Connection

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4. You must have made the Ethernet cross-connections in Lab Exercise 11.

Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

Remove the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

What were the colors of the connectors before you made the cross-connection?

Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________

What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?

Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________

Did the cross-connection line disappear? Yes ____________ No _____________

If the cross-connection line disappeared, explain why that happened:

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

If the cross-connection line did not disappear, explain why it is still there:

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of removing the cross-connections.

Disable the Ethernet port you configured in Lab Exercise # 7.

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Severity Event Time Entity Probable Cause

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 24

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 24

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 16 - Remove Radio Cross-Connection

1. You must be logged into Microsoft Windows on your class computer.

2. You must have the NEtO application running.

3. You must have the DS1, DS3, and Ethernet ports configured in Lab Exercises 6, 7. and 8.

4. You must have made the Ethernet cross-connections in Lab Exercise 11.

Click on the cross-connections icon to open the cross-connections screen.

Remove the cross-connections as directed by the instructor.

What were the colors of the connectors before you made the cross-connection?

Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________

What are the colors of the connectors after you made the cross-connection?

Ethernet ________________ Radio _____________

Did the cross-connection line disappear? Yes ____________ No _____________

If the cross-connection line disappeared, explain why that happened:

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

If the cross-connection line did not disappear, explain why it is still there:

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

List any new Alarms that have occurred as a result of removing the cross-connections.

Disable the Ethernet port you configured in Lab Exercise # 7.

Close the cross-connections screen and return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise.

Severity Event Time Entity Probable Cause

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 25

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 25

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Lab Exercise 17 - Browser Interface

1. Open a Web Browser. Type the IP Address of your assigned radio into the Address bar of the Web Browser.

2. When the Logon dialog box opens, use the following to log on:

Logon: ____________________________________________________________

Password: _________________________________________________________

3. How many Active Alarms are displayed?

4. Click on ‘Refresh’ . Recheck the Active Alarms.

5. Click on ‘Enable Automatic Refresh’. Recheck the Active Alarms in 5 minutes.

6. Click on > Date & Time Setting. Compare the Operating System Time with the GMT Time.

7. Click on > License Info. Examine the RMU Serial Number and License String.

8. Access the SW License information in the Browser View.

9. Logout from the Browser interface.

10. Return to the NE Main View for the next Exercise

Alarm Number

Critical

Major

Minor

Warning

Indeterminate

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.TWT42013-14 Edition 3.03

Section 7 · Module 1 · Page 26

9500 MPR (Microwave Packet Radio) · Operations & Maintenance R3.03 (ANSI)Exercises · Labs7 · 1 · 26

COPYRIGHT © ALCATEL-LUCENT 2012. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

End of moduleLabs

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR@@COURSENAME - Page 1

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

@@COURSENAME@@PRODUCT1

Last but one page

CongratulationsYou have finished the training

Your feedback is appreciated!Please feel free to Email your comments to:

[email protected]

Please include the training reference in your email (see cover page)

Thank you!

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR@@COURSENAME - Page 2

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent